OPERATOR S MANUAL COMAND AND REAR-CABIN AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM. Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm in den Grafikrahmen importieren!

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "OPERATOR S MANUAL COMAND AND REAR-CABIN AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM. Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm in den Grafikrahmen importieren!"

Transcription

1 OPERATOR S MANUAL COMAND AND REAR-CABIN AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Grafk n der Größe 216x79 mm n den Grafkrahmen mporteren!

2 Welcome to COMAND and the rear-cabn audovsual system! Please make yourself famlar wth your CO- MAND and rear-cabn audovsual system control unts and read the nstructons n ths manual before operatng the COMAND and rear-cabn audovsual system. Ths wll help you derve a greater beneft from the system. Please also follow the nstructons and warnngs contaned n ths manual. Ignorng them could result n damage to the vehcle or personal njury to you or others. Dependng on model, verson and confguraton, your COMAND and rear-cabn audovsual system equpment may dffer. Therefore, you may fnd explanatons for optonal equpment not nstalled n your vehcle. If you have any questons about the operaton of any equpment, your authorzed Maybach Studo wll be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. We contnuously strve to mprove our product and ask for your understandng that we reserve the rght to make changes n desgn and equpment. Therefore, nformaton, llustratons and descrptons n ths manual mght dffer from the equpment nstalled n your vehcle. As such, the nformaton, llustratons and descrptons contaned n ths manual may not be reasonably reled upon n makng any clams wth respect to the actual performance of the product. These operatng nstructons form an ntegral part of the vehcle and should therefore always be kept nsde the vehcle and passed on to the new owner f the vehcle s sold. We extend our best wshes for many mles of safe, pleasurable drvng. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A Damler Company

3

4 Contents Introducton Where to fnd t Symbols Operatng safety At a glance Front Cabn Rado operatng elements CD operatng elements MP3 operatng elements Satellte rado operatng elements.. 20 Telephone operatng elements Navgaton operatng elements General nformaton Vehcle equpment Multfuncton steerng wheel Selectng the multfuncton dsplay Audo search functon Voce Control System Menu system Openng man menus Menu dsplay Menu functons and submenus.. 32 Quck reference COMAND System structure Swtchng ON/OFF Settng sound volume Changng operaton mode Control of the rear cabn control unts from the front cabn (drver) control unt Balance and fader Bass and treble Sound functons System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs Vehcle equpment Callng up the System menu Selectable soft keys Settng the date/tme Selectng the language Swtchng confrmaton beeps and acoustc sgnals ON/OFF Dsplay settngs Voce control settngs Reset functon Audo - Front Cabn Audo man menu Vehcle equpment Callng up the Audo man menu. 52 Selectable soft keys Mute functon Rado operaton Swtchng to Rado mode Swtchng to Rado mode Swtchng wavebands Tunng to an FM / AM staton Tunng to a staton on Weather Band Storng of statons CD operaton General nformaton Tps on carng for your CDs Swtchng to CD mode Loadng a CD Ejectng a CD CD man menu Selectng a track Fast forward/reverse Playback optons MP3 operaton Safety Instructons Tps on data storage meda Tps on carng for your MP3 CDs. 64 Tps on creatng MP3 CDs Tps on creatng MP3 tracks Tps on copyrght Swtchng to MP3 mode Loadng a MP3 CD Ejectng a MP3 CD MP3 man menu

5 Contents Selectng folders Selectng a track Fast forward/reverse Playback optons Audo AUX operaton Swtchng to AUX mode Satellte rado Front Cabn General nformaton Vehcle equpment Introducton to satellte rado Satellte rado operaton Callng up the SAT man menu.. 75 Soft key functons Selectng a staton Obtanng addtonal text nformaton Storng of statons Callng the SIRIUS Servce Center 79 Telephone Front Cabn Important notes Vehcle equpment Safety Instructons Tps on telephone operaton Notes about Bluetooth connectons Telephone operaton Swtchng the phone ON/OFF "911" emergency calls Enterng the PIN (only GSM) Enterng the unlock code Swtchng to telephone mode Telephone man menu Selectable soft keys and optons.. 88 Answerng an ncomng call Outgong call / Dalng a phone number Accepted and mssed calls Daled calls Speed dal Establshng a connecton Actve call Phone book Openng the phone book Selectng a phone book entry and establshng the connecton. 95 Addng spoken names to a phone book entry Deletng a phone book entry SMS (Mal) SMS nbox Readng a message Deletng a message Extng from the SMS menu Navgaton Front Cabn Important notes Vehcle equpment Safety nstructons Navgaton DVD Loadng/ejectng the DVD Travellng abroad Route gudance wth GPS Route gudance after vehcle transport Trp nterrupton durng route gudance Selecton lsts Navgaton man menu Callng up the Navgaton man menu Avodng certan road types Adjustng the acoustcs for voce announcements Destnaton nput Enterng data Enterng a home address Destnaton entry menu Enterng a destnaton Selectng the regon Enterng a cty Narrowng of the destnaton after selectng a cty

6 Contents Enterng a cty center Enterng a street n the destnaton cty Narrowng of the destnaton after selectng the street Enterng an ntersecton Enterng a house number Enterng a destnaton usng the map Enterng a destnaton va geo coordnates Storng map locaton Route gudance Startng route gudance Route calculaton Route re-calculaton Voce announcements Navgaton dsplays Destnaton reached Cancellng route gudance Partally dgtzed areas Durng route gudance Showng soft key dsplays Info menu Dsplayng the route on the map Dsplayng the route lst Detour functon Stopover Defnng route gudance dsplays 130 Settng symbol dsplays Settng map orentaton Map dsplay menu Automatc map togglng Scales for full-screen and splt-screen map dsplay Last destnaton and destnaton memory Last destnatons memory Destnaton memory POI (Ponts of Interest) Enterng POIs Selectng POI n the local area of the current locaton Selectng POI for a selected cty. 140 Selectng POI for a long-dstance destnaton Selectng a POI usng the map Software update Voce Control Front Cabn Important notes Vehcle equpment Functonal overvew Command types Actve system Controls Actvaton/deactvaton of Voce Control System Actvatng Voce Control Deactvatng Voce Control Settng volume level Dsplay Telephone Telephone operaton Telephone commands Phone book operaton Phone book commands Rado Rado operaton Rado commands CD player CD player operaton CD player commands MP3 player MP3 player operaton MP3 player commands Command lst General commands Telephone commands Audo commands Sub commands Practcal hnts Help functon Help commands Help screen

7 Contents What to do Vsual help Indvdualzaton Servce - Front Cabn Tele Ad Vehcle equpment Emergency call system Roadsde Assstance Informaton At a Glance - Rear Cabn Rado operatng elements CD operatng elements MP3 operatng elements TV operatng elements DVD operatng elements Telephone operatng elements Remote control Vehcle equpment Menu system Callng up man menus Menu dsplay Menu functons and submenus. 197 Quck reference System structure Swtchng ON/OFF Settng sound volume Changng operaton mode Headphones operaton Dsplay Balance and Fader System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs Vehcle equpment Callng up the System menu Selectable soft keys Settng the date/tme Settng the language Swtchng confrmaton beeps and acoustc sgnals ON/OFF Dsplay settngs Voce control settngs Reset functon Audo Rear Cabn Audo/Vdeo man menu Vehcle equpment Callng up the Audo/Vdeo man menu Selectable menu tems Swtchng between audo/vdeo source Mute functon Swtchng actve audo/vdeo source on/off Rado operaton Swtchng to rado mode Swtchng wavebands Tunng to an FM/AM staton Tunng to a staton on Weather Band Storng statons CD operaton Safety Instructons Tps on carng for your CDs Swtchng to the CD mode CD changer Loadng CDs Ejectng CDs CD man menu Selectng CD Selectng a track Fast forward/reverse Playback optons MP3 operaton Safety notes Notes about dscs Notes about handlng MP3 dscs. 234 Notes on creatng MP3 dscs Notes on creatng MP3 tracks Notes on copyrght

8 Contents Swtchng to MP3 operaton Loadng MP3 dscs Ejectng MP3 dscs MP3 man menu, rear cabn Selectng a folder Selectng a track Fast forward/rewnd Playback optons Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton Vehcle equpment General Informaton Swtchng to TV operaton Tunng-out of mage and audo 242 TV dsplay and TV status bar Program selecton Program storage TV basc settngs DVD operaton Safety Instructons General nformaton DVD Playback Swtchng to DVD operaton DVD dsplay and DVD status bar 251 DVD dsplay functons DVD menu Settngs menu Interactve contents Vdeo Aux operaton Front Telephone Rear Cabn Important notes Vehcle equpment Safety Instructons Tps on telephone operaton Notes about Bluetooth connectons Telephone operaton Swtchng the phone ON/OFF "911" emergency calls Enterng the PIN (only GSM) Enterng the unlock code Swtchng to telephone mode Telephone man menu Selectable menu tems and optons Answerng an ncomng call Placng an outgong call Accepted and mssed calls Actve call Phone book Openng the phone book Selectng a phone book entry and establshng the connecton Addng spoken names to a phone book entry Deletng a phone book entry SMS (Short Message Servce) SMS nbox Readng a message Deletng a message Extng from the SMS menu Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Important notes Vehcle equpment Tps on telephone operaton General nformaton Rear cabn telephone system Calls dsconnected whle the vehcle s n moton Connectng the moble phone Regsterng a moble phone Connectng a moble phone wth the rear cabn telephone system Swtchng off the rear cabn telephone system Rear cabn telephone system bracket Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Controller Man menu

9 Contents Menu overvew Dsplay keyboard Usng the telephone Servce - Rear Cabn Tele Ad Vehcle equpment Emergency call system Roadsde Assstance Informaton Glossary Index

10 Where to fnd t Ths Operator's Manual s desgned to provde support for you, the COMAND or rearcabn audovsual system operator. Each chapter has ts own gude color to provde fast access to nformaton. At a glance - Front cabn Here you wll fnd an overvew of all COMAND control elements of the drver s (front cabn) control unt. The followng chapter "General Operaton" contans the descrpton of the basc functons, and of the nteractons between the varous control unts and the menu system. Study ths chapter thoroughly f ths s your frst attempt to operate COMAND. System settngs - Front cabn Ths part contans nformaton concernng the necessary system settngs for the CO- MAND at the front-cabn control unt. The followng second part of the operatng nstructons covers the operaton of the rear-cabn control unts. Audo - Front cabn Ths part contans all nformaton for the Audo system, whch ncludes the components Rado, CD and MP3, and ther control at the front-cabn control unt. SAT - Front cabn Ths part contans all nformaton for the satellte rado system, and ts control at the front-cabn control unt. Telephone - Front cabn Ths part contans all nformaton requred for the operaton of the telephone at the front-cabn control unt, ncludng emergency calls. Introducton Where to fnd t Navgaton - Front cabn Ths part contans detaled nformaton for the operaton of the Navgaton system at the front-cabn control unt, coverng the followng topcs: Destnaton entry Route selecton Route gudance Destnaton memory Voce Control System - Front cabn Ths part contans all nformaton for the Voce Control system, whch ncludes all functons, commands, practcal hnts and preferences. Servce - Front cabn Ths part contans nformaton concernng Tele Ad. 9

11 Introducton Where to fnd t At a glance - Rear cabn Here you wll fnd an overvew of all control elements of the rear cabn control unts. The then followng chapter "General operaton" contans the descrpton of the basc functons, and of the nteractons between the varous control unts and the menu system. Study ths chapter thoroughly f ths s your frst attempt to operate the rear-cabn system components. System settngs - Rear cabn Ths part contans nformaton concernng necessary system settngs for the audovsual system at the rear-cabn control unts. Audo - Rear cabn Ths part contans all nformaton for the Audo system, whch ncludes the components Rado, CD and MP3, and ther control at the rear-cabn control unts. Vdeo - Rear cabn Ths part contans all nformaton requred for the operaton of the Vdeo system, wth ts components TV and DVD, at the rearcabn control unts. Due to the swtchover to all-dgtal TV networks, the TV functon s dsabled n devces produced for the US market. Servce - Rear cabn Ths part contans nformaton concernng Tele Ad. Index The ndex wll help you quckly locate the nformaton you need. Front telephone - Rear cabn Ths part contans all nformaton requred for the operaton of the telephone at the rear-cabn control unts, ncludng emergency calls. Rear telephone - Rear cabn Ths part contans all nformaton requred for the operaton of the telephone system n the rear cabn. 10

12 Symbols Symbols The followng symbols are used n ths operaton manual: G Warnng Warnng notces draw your attenton to hazards that may endanger your health or lfe, or the health or lfe of others. H Envronmental note An envronmental note offers advce concernng envronmental protecton. Hnts or further helpful nformaton. Ths symbol hghlghts nstructons to be followed. A number of these symbols appearng n successon ndcates a multple-step procedure. Ths contnuaton symbol ndcates an nterrupted procedure, beng contnued on the next page. Introducton Symbols page Ths symbol tells you where to look for further nformaton on the subject. Dsplay Words appearng on the CO- MAND dsplay or multfuncton dsplay are prnted n the type shown here. s Ths symbol stands for commands and voce entres you are speakng. t Ths symbol stands for voce output by the system. u Ths symbol ndcates that nformaton s avalable on the man dsplay.! Hghlghts hazards that may result n damage to your COMAND or rear-cabn audovsual system. 11

13 Introducton Operatng safety Operatng safety G Warnng Any alteraton of electronc components or software can cause malfunctons. Rado, satellte rado, amplfer, CD changer, TV, DVD player, navgaton module, telephone and voce control systems are nterconnected. Therefore, f one of the components s not operatonal, or has not been removed/ replaced properly, the functon of other components could be mpared. Such condtons mght serously mpar the operatng safety of your vehcle. We recommend to have any servce work on electronc components carred out by an authorzed Maybach Studo. G Warnng In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should enter system settngs whle the vehcle s at a standstll, and operate the system only when road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/ h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. COMAND supples you wth nformaton to help you select your route more easly and gude you convenently and safely to your destnaton. For safety reasons, we encourage the drver to stop the vehcle n a safe place before answerng or placng a call, or consultng the COMAND screen to read navgatonal maps, nstructons, or downloaded nformaton. G Warnng Whle the navgaton system provdes drectonal assstance, the drver must reman focused on safe drvng behavor, especally attenton to traffc and street sgns, and should utlze the system's audo cues whle drvng. The navgaton system does not supply any nformaton on stop sgns, yeld sgns, traffc regulatons or traffc safety rules. Ths always remans your personal responsblty when you drve. Dgtal maps do not cover all areas nor all routes wthn an area. 12

14 At a glance Front Cabn Rado operatng elements CD operatng elements MP3 operatng elements Satellte rado operatng elements Telephone operatng elements.. 22 Navgaton operatng elements.. 24 General nformaton Multfuncton steerng wheel Menu system Quck reference COMAND

15 At a glance Front Cabn Rado operatng elements Rado operatng elements Rado operatng elements 14

16 At a glance Front Cabn Rado operatng elements Functon Page Functon Page Functon Page 1 Audo man menu 52 6 Confrmaton 8 Swtchng ON/OFF 34 2 Soft keys (multfuncton buttons) 3 Dsplay 4 Mute functon 52 5,,, Tunng of FM/AM 54 statons Staton memory, 57 selectng presets 7 - Manual entry of frequences Storng statons Requestng staton presets Volume adjustment 35 a and Staton search 54 Manual tunng 56 15

17 At a glance Front Cabn CD operatng elements CD operatng elements CD operatng elements 16

18 Functon 1 Audo man menu 2 Soft keys (multfuncton buttons) Page 52 3 CD slot 59 4 Dsplay 5 Mute functon 52 Functon Page 6 and Selectng tracks 62 7 Confrmaton 8 and - Entry of track numbers 61 9 Swtchng ON/OFF 34 At a glance Front Cabn CD operatng elements Functon Page a Volume adjustment 35 b and Skppng of tracks forward/reverse 61 Forward/reverse 63 c CD ejecton 60 17

19 At a glance Front Cabn MP3 operatng elements MP3 operatng elements MP3 operatng elements 18

20 Functon 1 Page Audo man menu 52 2 Soft keys (multfuncton buttons) 3 MP3 CD slot 66 4 Dsplay 5 Mute functon 52 Functon Page 6 and Selectng tracks 68 and Selectng folders 67 7 Confrmaton 8 and - Entry of track numbers 69 9 Swtchng ON/OFF 34 At a glance Front Cabn MP3 operatng elements Functon Page a Volume adjustment 35 b and Skppng of tracks forward/reverse 68 Forward/reverse 70 c MP3 CD ejecton 66 19

21 At a glance Front Cabn Satellte rado operatng elements Satellte rado operatng elements Satellte rado operatng elements 20

22 At a glance Front Cabn Satellte rado operatng elements Functon Page Functon Page Functon Page 1 Satellte rado man menu 2 Soft keys (multfuncton buttons) 3 Dsplay 75 4 Mute functon 52 5,,, Selecton buttons 6 Confrmaton 7 - Manual channel entry Channel storage Channel recall Swtchng ON/OFF 34 9 Volume adjustment 35 a and Automatc channel search 78 21

23 At a glance Front Cabn Telephone operatng elements Telephone operatng elements Telephone operatng elements 22

24 At a glance Front Cabn Telephone operatng elements Functon Page Functon Page Functon Page 1 Soft keys (multfuncton buttons) 2 Dsplay 3,,, Selecton buttons 4 Confrmaton 5 Answerng a call Placng a call Redalng Telephone man menu 88 Swtchng the telephone ON Swtchng the telephone OFF Endng or refusng a call Enterng PIN 86 Enterng unlock code 87 Enterng phone number 89 Speed dalng 92 9 Swtchng ON/OFF 34 a Volume adjustment 35 23

25 At a glance Front Cabn Navgaton operatng elements Navgaton operatng elements Navgaton operatng elements 24

26 Functon Page 1 Soft keys (multfuncton buttons) 2 Dsplay 3 Navgaton man menu 104 Cancellng route gudance Swtchng to map dsplay 120 Functon Page 5 Swtchng voce announcements OFF Current voce announcement 119 Swtchng voce announcements ON 119 At a glance Front Cabn Navgaton operatng elements Functon Page 7,,,,, Selectng optons Selectng characters for text entry Map scrollng 8 Confrmaton 9 Swtchng ON/OFF 34 a Volume adjustment 35 25

27 At a glance Front Cabn General nformaton General nformaton General nformaton Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual.! COMAND Dsplay Do not touch the COMAND dsplay. The dsplay has a senstve surface; there s a rsk of scratchng. If the dsplay needs cleanng, use a commercally avalable alcohol and ammona-free TFT or LCD cleaner and a soft, antstatc, lnt-free cloth. 26

28 At a glance Front Cabn Multfuncton steerng wheel Multfuncton steerng wheel Multfuncton steerng wheel Functon Page Functon Page 1 Multfuncton dsplay 2 Volume adjustment ç Volume down æ Volume up Rado mode: k Prevous staton: va staton search va staton presets P _A 3 Telephone operaton: s Answerng calls Placng calls Redalng t Endng or refusng a call Enterng a phone number: Deletng the entre enty 4 Multfuncton dsplay menu change: è forward ÿ back 5 Rado mode: j Next staton: va staton search va staton presets CD mode: j Next track k Prevous track MP3 mode: j Next track k Prevous track Satellte rado mode: j Next staton k Prevous staton Telephone mode: j Next lst entry k Prevous lst entry

29 At a glance Front Cabn Multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay to the respectve system f you ntend to operate the system usng the buttons on the multfuncton steerng wheel. Selectng the multfuncton dsplay On the multfuncton steerng wheel, press è or ÿ repeatedly untl one of the followng, audo, satellte rado, or telephone dsplay appears n the multfuncton dsplay of the nstrument cluster. Rado operaton: Satellte rado: 1 Channel name or number 2 SAT mode and preset number CD operaton: P MP3 operaton: 1 Current track 2 MP3 mode Telephone operaton: Ether the man dsplay, or a lst appears on the dsplay. Telephone man dsplay: 1 Staton frequency 2 Waveband and poston n Preset menu 1 Current track 2 CD mode In the lst screen, nstead of the Ready message, ether a phone book entry or one of the last 10 outgong calls wll be dsplayed. In order to close the lst dsplay, press t. Ths swtches to the telephone man dsplay. 28

30 At a glance Front Cabn Multfuncton steerng wheel Audo search functon The followng functons are avalable: Freq. functon: You can tune to statons va the staton search ( page 54). Memory functon: You can tune to statons va the staton presets ( page 55). Settng audo search functon On the multfuncton steerng wheel, press è or ÿ repeatedly untl the Settngs... menu appears n the multfuncton dsplay n the ntsrument cluster. Press j and swtch to the submenu optons. Press æ or ç and select the Vehcle menu. Press j and select Audo Search Functon. By pressng æ or ç, select Freq. or Memory. Memory s set at the factory. 29

31 At a glance Front Cabn Voce Control System Voce Control System Voce Control System Functon Page 1! Actvate Voce Control System 2 0 Deactvate Voce Control System Volume adjustment æ Volume up 35 4 Volume adjustment ç Volume down 35 5 Telephone operaton: s Answerng calls 88 6 Telephone operaton: t Endng or refusng a call 93 30

32 At a glance Front Cabn Menu system Menu system Menu system Openng man menus Menu dsplay The menu system allows easy operaton of COMAND. A basc menu s provded at the drver s (front cabn) control unt for each of the followng man functons: Audo Callng up menus at the front cabn control unt: Audo Front ( page 52): Press. SAT ( page 75): Press. (Rado, CD, MP3 and AUX (External audo Navgaton ( page 104): source) operaton) Press. SAT operaton Telephone Front ( page 88): Navgaton Press. Telephone Servce Front ( page 44): Servce - Front cabn Press. A basc menu s provded at the rear cabn control unts for each of the followng Callng up menus at the rear cabn controls: 1 Soft key sectons man functons: 2 Man area Audo/Vdeo Rear cabn ( page 216): 3 Status bar Audo/Vdeo Press (Rado, CD, and AUX operaton) Servce - Rear cabn Servce Rear cabn ( page 208): Press (Telephone, Navgaton, Map, Servce) A dsplay can be composed of 3 sectons. Example: Rado man menu, Front cabn control The functons currently assgned to the soft keys are dsplayed n the soft key sectons 1. A maxmum of fve soft keys may be dsplayed on each sde of the man area 2. Messages or settngs are dsplayed n the man area 2. Current settngs can be altered usng the controls accordngly. 31

33 At a glance Front Cabn Menu system The status bar 3 s dvded nto three areas: Left sde: Currently selected operatng mode, n ths example: Rado Center: Indcaton of the selected operatng mode. In ths example: FM = selected waveband 1 = selected staton stored on preset 1 Rght sde: Dsplay of general status nformaton, regardless of the selected operatng mode. In ths example: ROAMING = telephone s logged nto a moble communcatons network outsde your home network. = telephone sgnal strength Ths nformaton s also dsplayed n Navgaton mode (only n map dsplays). The Scan soft key swtches the scan search ON or OFF. The Autost. soft key opens the submenu for the Autostore settngs. In some stuatons, soft keys may not have any functon and are not operatonal. An noperatonal soft key appears shaded out. Example: Delete soft key I Menu functons and submenus Usng the soft keys, functons can be swtched ON or OFF, or submenus can be opened. Example: Rado man menu, front cabn control. 32

34 At a glance Front Cabn Menu system Extng from submenus Extng from the current submenu s acheved by pressng the Back soft key. The dsplay swtches to the next hgher menu level. The system does not accept settng modfcatons unless they are stored. There are exceptons where pressng the Back soft key wll also store new settngs. These exceptons, whenever applcable, are lsted on the followng pages. 33

35 At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Quck reference COMAND Quck reference COMAND System structure COMAND and the rear-cabn audovsual system are composed of the followng control elements: Drver s (front cabn) control unt, two rear cabn control unts wth one remote control, a DVD drve between the rear seats (n vehcles wth center rear seat: behnd center armrest), a DVD drve for the navgaton system located on the left-sde of the trunk, a CD change drve between the rear seats (n vehcles wth center rear seat: behnd center armrest), headphones for the rear cabn, an AUX nterface n the glove compartment, and the AUX nterface between the rear seats (n vehcles wth center rear seat: behnd center armrest). COMAND s also nterconnected wth further components: The front cabn moble telephone, the Voce control system, and the multfuncton steerng wheel, ncludng dsplay. Addtonal nformaton and hnts for the operaton of these nterconnected components s provded n ther ndvdual manuals. The frst part of the operaton nstructons covers the front cabn control unt and the multfuncton steerng wheel. The second part covers the operaton of the system va remote control from the rearcabn s control unts. Ths chapter provdes an overvew of all front-cabn system components and a general descrpton of how they functon. More detaled nformaton can be found n the correspondng secton for each system component. Swtchng ON/OFF The ndvdual control unts can be swtched ON/OFF ndependently from each other. Swtchng ON/OFF of the front cabn (drver s) control unt Swtchng ON Turn the key n the steerng lock to poston 1 or 2. or Press. In both cases, the system actvates the operaton mode actvated pror to swtch-off, or the mode currently utlzed by the rear cabn control, or the man menu appears f another feature s actvated n the rear cabn, e.g. Audo (Rado, CD) or Vdeo (TV, DVD). Wthout the gnton key n poston 1 or 2 of the steerng lock, the system automatcally swtches OFF agan after approx. 30 mnutes of nactvty. 34

36 Swtchng OFF Turn the gnton key n the steerng lock to poston 0 and remove t, or Press. Swtchng ON/OFF of the rear cabn control unts Swtchng ON On the dsplay of the desred rear cabn control, press, or Wth the gnton swtched ON, or wth another control unt swtched ON, press key on the remote control. In both cases,the Audo/Vdeo man menu appears. If one of the rear cabn controls s already swtched ON, the other one adopts the selected operaton mode. Wthout the gnton key n poston 1 or 2 of the steerng lock, the system automatcally swtches OFF agan after approx. 30 mnutes of nactvty. Swtchng OFF Turn the gnton key n the steerng lock to poston 0 and remove t, or Press key on the dsplay of the desred rear cabn control unt, or Press key on the remote control. At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Settng sound volume Dfferent volume settngs are possble for: Navgaton Telephone Voce control. A common volume settng s provded for: Rado Satellte Rado CD If a telephone call s n progress (handsfree), you cannot swtch the COMAND OFF, s dsabled. MP3 AUX1 AUX2 DVD TV When settng the volume, the system automatcally stores the settng for the currently actve operatng mode. The volume of voce announcements can be adjusted durng an announcement on the front cabn control unt. 35

37 At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND The system stores the volume settngs when t s swtched OFF. After swtchng the system back on agan, the volume may be lower than at the tme when the system was swtched OFF. The volume s lower f the system was OFF for longer than 15 mnutes, or f at swtch-off the volume had been set on a value outsde a certan range. Vehcles wthout partton or Vehcles wth partton and partton open Turn the rotary control on the CO- MAND control unt, or Press æ or ç on the multfuncton steerng wheel, or On the remote control, press key æ or ç. The volume changes up or down, dependng on the drecton of rotaton or whch button/key was pressed. The volume selected last s stored by the system, regardless on whch control t had been selected. If headphones are used on one of the rear cabn controls, ther volume can be adjusted separately. Vehcles wth partton and partton closed Turn the rotary control on the CO- MAND control unt, or Press æ or ç on the multfuncton steerng wheel; Dependng on drecton of rotaton, or whch button was pressed, the volume n the drver s compartment can be lowered or rased. On the remote control, press key æ or ç. Dependng on whch key was pressed, the volume n the rear cabn compartment s beng lowered or rased. If headphones are used on one of the rear cabn controls, ther volume can be adjusted separately. Automatc volume control The automatc volume control feature adjusts the sound volume dependng on the nteror ambent noses and other parameters (e.g. wndows open or closed). Mute control COMAND cam be muted ether at the front cabn control unt, or at one of the rear cabn control unts. Mute control on the front cabn (drver) control unt. See "Mute functon" ( page 52). Mute control at one of the rear cabn control unts Press key on the remote control. COMAND s ether muted, or mutng s termnated. Wth mute control actvated, symbol appears on the dsplay. 36

38 Changng operaton mode On the front cabn control unt, the followng operaton modes can be selected: Audo (Rado, CD, MP3 or AUX mode) Satellte rado Navgaton Telephone Servce A rear cabn control unt allows the selecton of the followng operaton modes: Audo (Rado, CD, MP3, AUX1, or AUX2 mode) Vdeo (TV, DVD) Navgaton Telephone Servce Selecton of certan operaton modes at one of the control unts can be of consequence for the other control unts. Vehcles wthout partton Generally, the selected Audo or Vdeo mode s always actvated. If ths s done on the front cabn control unt, the rear cabn control unts change to the Audo/Vdeo man menu. Front sound actve appears n the status lne of the dsplay. At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Selectng a dfferent Audo or Vdeo mode on one of the rear cabn control unts changes the other rear cabn control unt to ths selecton. The front cabn control unt changes to the Audo or Vdeo man menu respectvely (f so equpped), and Rear sound actve appears n the status lne of the dsplay. Navgaton, Servce, and Telephone modes are excluded from ths functon, they reman actvated even f another operaton mode s selected on another control unt, as n these operaton modes, the Audo and Vdeo sources always reman actve n the background. Selecton of operaton modes Telephone, Servce, and Navgaton on a rear cabn control unt actvates these modes va the front cabn control unt. In ths case, the front cabn control unt changes to the mode selected on the rear cabn control unt. The actvated operaton mode can then be controlled on a rear cabn control unt as well as on the front cabn control unt. 37

39 At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Vehcles wth partton Partton closed Front cabn control unt and rear cabn control unts can be operated separately. Only the Telephone, Servce, and Navgaton modes allow access to the front cabn control unt by the rear cabn control unt(s). Partton open COMAND functons dentcal to the functon of a vehcle wthout partton. The Audo mode of the rear cabn control unt s adapted when the partton glass panel s opened. Control of the rear cabn control unts from the front cabn (drver) control unt. The two rear cabn control unts can be controlled from the front-cabn control unt. Actvaton of control of the rear cabn control unts control from the front cabn control unt Open the Audo man menu. 38 Press the Rear soft key. A selecton menu appears. Select the desred functon and press. An ndvdual functon, e.g. Rado, can be selected ether by pressng the Rado key, or nterventon wth the current status of the rear cabn control unt(s) s acheved by pressng a correspondng soft key. Select the desred control unt (left, rght, or both), then press. On the rear cabn control unt, ths s ndcated by dsplay of symbol. A rear cabn control unt can no longer be operated usng the remote control. Now the rear cabn control unt(s) can be controlled from the front cabn (drver) control unt. Deactvaton of control of the rear cabn control unts from the front cabn control unt On the front cabn control unt Press key. On the remote control of the rear cabn Press key. Balance and fader A common balance/fader settng apples to the followng operatng modes: Rado Satellte rado CD MP3 AUX DVD TV Separate balance/fader settngs are possble for navgaton mode. The nstructon s found under "Adjustng the acoustcs for voce announcements" ( page 105).

40 When adjustng the balance or the fader, the system automatcally stores the settngs for the currently actve operatng mode. Openng the Balance/Fader menu In Rado, CD, MP3 or AUX mode: Press the Bal/Fad soft key. The balance/fader menu appears on the dsplay. Balance and/or fader can now be adjusted. In TV or DVD mode: Wth blanked-out soft keys, press any one of the soft keys. The soft key descrptons become vsble. Press the Tone soft key. The Tone menu appears Press the Bal/Fad soft key. The Balance/Fader menu appears. Balance and/or fader can be adjusted. Settng balance/fader Call up the Balance/Fader menu ( page 39). A cross-har cursor appears. The vertcal lne ndcates the balance settngs. The horzontal lne ndcates the fader settngs. Press or. The cursor moves horzontally, adjustng the desred balance, or Press or. The cursor moves vertcally, adjustng the fader. Usng and, the cursor can be moved dagonally. At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Storng new settngs: Press or the Back soft key, or wat untl the dsplay changes. 39

41 At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Bass and treble For the followng operaton modes, dffernt settngs for bass and treble can be selected: Rado (FM waveband) Rado (AM waveband) Rado (Weather band) Satellte rado CD (CD changer) CD (Sngle-CD) MP3 AUX TV DVD Navgaton Separate bass/treble settngs are possble for navgaton. The descrpton s found under "Adjustng the acoustcs for voce announcements" ( page 105). When adjustng bass or treble, the system automatcally stores the settng for the currently actve operatng mode. Callng up Bass/Treble menu In Rado, CD, MP3 or Audo AUX mode: Press the Bass or Treble soft key. The Bass/Treble menu appears. Settng of bass/treble s now possble ( page 40). In TV, DVD, or Vdeo AUX mode: Wth blanked-out soft keys, press any one of the soft keys. The soft key descrptons become vsble. Press the Settng soft key. Press the Tone soft key. The Tone menu appears. Press the Bass or Treble soft key. The Bass/Treble menu appears. Settng of bass/treble s now possble ( page 40). Settng bass and treble Call up the Bass/Treble menu ( page 40). Press or. Adjust bass and/or treble as desred. Storng new settngs: Press or the Back soft key, or Wat untl the dsplay changes. 40

42 Sound functons The sound functons are avalable for the followng operatng modes: Rado CD MP3 SAT TV DVD AUX The followng sound functons are avalable: Default settngs: Reset of sound functons to factory settngs. Standard: Customary H-F sound. Front optmzed: Sound optmzed for best replay at the two front seats. Rear optmzed: Sound optmzed for best replay at the rear seats. Speech optmzed: Replay optmzed for speech comprehenson. Surround: Surround sound (not avalable for TV mode and for AM wave ranges n Rado mode). Dependng on vehcle type and selected operaton mode, dfferent sound modes can be actvated for each one of the operatng modes lsted above. Examples: For CD mode functon Default, for DVD mode functon Surround. At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Vehcles wth partton: Wth closed partton, Front optmzed cannot be selected from the rear cabn, and Back optmzed cannot be selected from the front cabn. Surround sound offers a sound qualty superor to conventonal stereo sound. Surround sound works wth all conventonal stereo audo sources (e.g. stereo CD or stereo rado). If the rado recepton s poor, the system should be swtched back to standard stereo playback. Swtchng back to standard stereo playback may mprove recepton qualty. 41

43 At a glance Front Cabn Quck reference COMAND Actvaton of the Equalzer functon In Rado, SAT, CD, MP3 or Audo AUX mode: Open the man menu of the desred operaton mode ( page 31). Press the Sound soft key. The Sound menu appears. In TV, DVD, or Vdeo AUX mode: Wth blanked-out soft keys, press any one of the soft keys. The soft key descrptons become vsble. Press the Settng soft key. The Settng menu appears. Press the Tone soft key. The Tone menu appears. Press the Sound soft key. The Sound menu appears. Press key or to select the desred functon. Press key. The functon s actvated. Press key or to select the desred functon. Press key. The functon s actvated. 42

44 System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs

45 System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs System settngs System settngs Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Callng up the System menu Press. The System menu appears. Selectable soft keys The followng optons are avalable n the system settngs: Tme soft key: For date and tme settng ( page 44). Lang. soft key: For language selecton ( page 46). Tones soft key: For ON/OFF swtchng of confrmaton beeps and acoustc sgnals ( page 46). Dsplay soft key: For changes of dsplay settngs ( page 47). VC tps soft key: To call up the Voce control menu. ( page 47). Reset soft key: For resettng COMAND to the factory settngs ( page 50). Settng the date/tme Press the Tme soft key. The settngs dsplay appears. The followng optons are now avalable: Settng the tme Settng the date Settng the date/tme format. 44

46 Settng the tme The UTC tme transmtted by the GPS satelltes has to be set to the local tme zone. Ths enhances correct navgaton for routes wth tmedependent traffc gudance, and correct calculaton of the estmated tme of arrval. There s no automatc change from daylght savng tme to standard tme. Ths has to be changed manually. When you change the tme zone, the clock tme also changes automatcally. If you enter an ncorrect tme, the tme dfference remans unchanged when you change tme zone. Press or to select the hours or the mnutes. Press or. Hours and/or mnutes are set as selected. Settng the mnutes: Wth GPS recepton, each tme or are pressed the tme s changed n ncrements of 30 mnutes. Wthout GPS recepton, the tme s changed n ncrements of 1 mnute. Settng the hours: Each tme the or keys are pressed the hours change n ncrements of 1 hour. Press the Back soft key. The new settng s stored. Settng the date The date can be set only f GPS recepton s not avalable. Press or to select the day, the month and/or the year. Press or. Dependng on the selecton, the day, the month, or the year s set. Press the Back soft key. The new settng s stored. Settng the Date/Tme format Press the Format soft key. You wll see the date and tme followng the currently selected format, as well as a lst of possble formats. System Settngs - Front Cabn Settng the format: System settngs Lst entry 1-3: Date formats Lst entry 4 and 5: Tme formats (Entry 5 s not vsble on the dsplay example below.) Sold crcle : format set Empty crcle : format not set Press or to select a format. Press. The approprate format s selected. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. The new settng s stored. 45

47 System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs Selectng the language The language settng changes the dsplay language as well as the language used for voce announcements. In the System menu, press the Lang. soft key ( page 44). The language lst appears on the dsplay. Press or to select one of the lsted languages. Press. Instr. cluster settngs: The system swtches to the language already set n the vehcle nstrument cluster. Other optons: The system swtches to the requested language. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. Swtchng confrmaton beeps and acoustc sgnals ON/OFF In the System menu, press the Tones soft key ( page 44). The lst of avalable sounds appears on the dsplay. Press or to select an entry. Press. The requested sounds are swtched ON or OFF. The square next to a lst entry shows the status. Empty square = sound OFF Sold square = sound ON 46

48 Press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. The System menu appears. The new settng s stored. Dsplay settngs Call up the System menu ( page 44). Press the Dsplay soft key. The Dsplay settngs menu appears. The followng optons are avalable: Swtchng between day or nght dsplay ( page 47), or adjustng the dsplay brghtness ( page 47). Settng the dsplay dmmng characterstcs You can select from 3 dsplay dmmng modes: Day mode: The dsplay s contnuously set to daytme desgn. Nght mode: The dsplay s contnuously set to nghttme desgn. Automatc: The desgn wll change dependng on the llumnaton of the nstrument cluster. Press or to select an entry. Press. Adjustng dsplay brghtness In the Dsplay settngs menu, press the Brght. soft key. The Brghtness dsplay appears. System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs Press or. The brghtness changes accordngly. Press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. The new settng s stored. Voce control settngs Use ths functon to: start or delete voce control ndvdualzaton actvate/deactvate the voce control help wndow 47

49 System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs Actvatng/deactvatng the help wndow Open the system menu ( page 44). Press the VC tps soft key. The Voce Control menu appears. Press to select menu tem Indvdualzaton. Press. The ndvdualzaton menu appears. Press the key to select the Help wndow menu tem. The status lst shows you whether the help wndow s actvated or deactvated. Press. The menu to actvate or deactvate the help wndow appears. The sold crcle shows whether the help wndow s actvated or deactvated. For example: help wndow s actvated Press or to select the menu tem wth the empty crcle. Press. Actvate or deactvate the help wndow. Voce control Indvdualzaton The ndvdualzaton s used to adapt the voce control to your own voce and to therefore mprove speech recognton. Ths does not affect the speech recognton of other users. Indvdualzaton conssts of two stages. The frst stage nvolves tranng dgts, whlst the second stage trans specfc commands. From the system menu, press ( page 44) the VC tps soft key. The voce control menu appears. Startng ndvdualzaton You can only actvate the ndvdualzaton functon when the car s statonary. If the car s movng, the followng message appears: Indvdualzaton only possble when car s statonary. Press to select menu tem Start new ndvdualzaton. Press. The ndvdualzaton process starts. 48

50 The system now gudes you through the ndvdualzaton process usng a dalog, all operatons are voce nputs. After completon of the frst stage, the system prompts you to save the data from the frst stage. If you don t save the frst stage: ndvdualzaton s cancelled data from an exstng frst stage remans unchanged If you save the frst stage: data from an exstng frst stage s overwrtten but s not saved untl the second stage s started. If you don t start the second stage: data from the frst stage remans unchanged the ndvdualzaton process s fnshed If you later decde to start the second stage, you must restart the ndvdualzaton process from the begnnng of the frst stage. Once the second stage has fnshed, the system asks f you want to save the data of the second stage. If you don t save the second stage: ndvdualzaton s cancelled data from an exstng second stage remans unchanged If you save the second stage: data from an exstng second stage s deleted and all new data s saved The ndvdualzaton process s fnshed Cancel ndvdualzaton You can cancel the ndvdualzaton at any tme durng ether the frst or second stage. All exstng data remans unchanged. Durng any stage, press the soft key Cancel. Indvdualzaton s cancelled. Deletng ndvdualzaton Ths functon s not avalable f no ndvdualzaton data has been saved. System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs From the ndvdualzaton menu, press to select menu tem Delete ndvdualzaton. Press. A prompt appears, whch asks f you really want to delete the data. Press to select Yes f you want to delete the data. Press. The ndvdualzaton data s deleted. 49

51 System Settngs - Front Cabn System settngs Reset functon Pressng the Reset functon resets COMAND to the factory settngs. In addton, t deletes: SMS: All SMS messages. Navgaton: All entres n the Destnaton memory and n the Last destnaton memory. Actvatng Reset functon Call up the System menu ( page 44). Press the Reset soft key. A prompt appears askng f resettng the system and deletng the data s really ntended. If you want to reset the system, press to select menu tem Yes. Press. Agan a prompt appears to confrm f resettng the system and deletng the data s really ntended. If you want to reset the system, press to select menu tem Yes. Press. Ths resets the entre system. If resettng the system and deletng the data s NOT ntended: Press to select menu tem No. Press. Ths exts the reset screen. 50

52 Audo - Front Cabn Audo man menu Rado operaton CD operaton MP3 operaton Audo AUX operaton

53 Audo - Front Cabn Audo man menu Audo man menu Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Audo man menu Callng up the Audo man menu Press. The Audo man menu appears. If one of the Audo submenus appears: Press the Back soft key as often as necessary untl the Audo man menu appears. or Press agan. Varous audo sources can be selected from the Audo man menu. Selectable soft keys Rado soft key Staton settngs for WB, FM, or AM wavebands appear ( page 53) CD soft key or MP3 soft key The CD man menu ( page 61) or the MP3 man menu ( page 67) appears. AUX soft key Facltates operaton of an external audo source ( page 72). Rear soft key The rear cabn control unts can be accessed ( page 38). The Satellte Rado menu s accessed by pressng the button ( page 75). Mute functon Swtchng the mute functon ON Press. The system s swtched to mute. The mute functon s stll actvated f the rado s swtched off and then on agan. Swtchng the mute functon OFF Press agan, or Turn the rotary control on the CO- MAND control unt, or Press æ or ç on the multfuncton steerng wheel. The audo source heard s the one selected before the mute functon was actvated. 52

54 Rado operaton Swtchng to Rado mode Rado operaton G Warnng In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should enter system settngs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the audo system only f permtted by road, weather and traffc condtons. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. Swtchng to Rado mode Call up the Audo man menu ( page 52). Press the Rado soft key. The Rado man menu appears. The staton last tuned to begns to play. In ths example: Weather Band Channel 1 = current staton Swtchng wavebands Press the FM/AM soft key n the Rado man menu. The Rado man menu for FM or AM waveband appears. The staton last tuned to begns to play. Press the FM/AM soft key agan to swtch between FM and AM wavebands. Audo - Front Cabn Rado operaton The waveband s ndcated n the center of the status bar. In ths example: FM = FM waveband (VHF) 1 = selected staton s stored on preset 1 The wavebands cover dfferent frequency ranges: FM waveband: FM broadcast band MHz Tunng ncrements 0.2 MHz AM waveband: AM broadcast band khz Tunng ncrements 10 khz WB waveband: WB (weather band) MHz Tunng ncrements = 1 channel 53

55 Audo - Front Cabn Rado operaton Tunng to an FM / AM staton The followng optons are avalable: Tunng va staton search ( page 54). Tunng va staton presets ( page 54). Tunng va Autostore presets ( page 55). Tunng va scan search ( page 55). Manual tunng ( page 56). Tunng va drect frequency nput ( page 56). Tunng va staton search On COMAND control unt Swtch to the desred FM or AM waveband ( page 53). Press or : The next recevable ascendng frequency s tuned n and begns to play, or Press or : The next recevable descendng frequency s tuned n and begns to play. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Audo search functon Freq. must be set n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 29). Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the rado dsplay ( page 28). Press j: The next recevable ascendng frequency s tuned n and begns to play, or Press k: The next recevable descendng frequency s tuned n and begns to play. Tunng va staton presets Ten presets each are avalable for FM and AM. On COMAND control unt The presets are accessed usng the number keypad, or from the Memory menu. Accessng va number keypad: Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 53). Press one of the number keys - : The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Accessng va memory menu: Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 53). Press the Presets soft key. The Presets menu appears. Use,, or to choose a preset and press, or Press one of the number keys -. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. 54

56 On the multfuncton steerng wheel Audo search functon Memory must be set n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 29). Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the Rado dsplay ( page 28). Press j: The system tunes to the next staton stored n the staton presets; or Press k: The system tunes to the prevous staton stored n the staton presets. Tunng va Autostore presets The Autostore functon allows storng of statons nto the presets, sorted by recepton qualty ( page 58). The system wll store the staton wth the strongest sgnal n preset 1. Ten presets each are avalable for FM and AM. Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 53). Press the Autost. soft key. The Autostore preset lst appears. It could take several seconds untl all frequences are dsplayed. Use,,, or to choose a preset and press, or Press one of the number keys -. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Audo - Front Cabn Rado operaton Tunng va Scan search Scan search s characterzed as follows: Scan search performs two runs. Durng the frst run, statons wth extremely good recepton are played. Durng the second run, statons wth weaker recepton are played. Scan search plays each recevable staton for approx. 8 seconds. Scan search can be manually termnated. Scan search performs two runs. Durng the frst run, statons wth good recepton are played. Durng the second run, statons wth weaker recepton are played. The scan search automatcally stops at the staton lstened to before the scan search was started. Startng Scan search Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 53). Press the Scan soft key. Scannng begns. 55

57 Audo - Front Cabn Rado operaton Endng Scan search manually Press the Scan soft key agan. Manual tunng Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 53). Press or to scroll up or down. Press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds. Manual tunng s actvated. Keep the button pressed or release t and keep tappng t n quck successon. The frequency wll change by the tunng ncrements for the respectve waveband each tme the button s pressed, or contnually for as long as the button s pressed and held. Manual tunng s deactvated f no button s pressed for approx. 3 seconds. FM waveband: Tunng ncrements 0.2 MHz AM waveband: Tunng ncrements 10 khz Manual tunng s also possble n all wavebands by pressng or. The frequency wll change by the tunng ncrements for the respectve waveband each tme one of the buttons s pressed. Frequency ncrements for manual tunng: FM 0.2 MHz AM 10 khz Tunng va drect frequency nput Entry example: 98.5 MHz n FM waveband Swtch to the FM waveband ( page 53). Press. The frequency nput dsplay appears. The frequency range of the FM waveband s shown. Press the number buttons n successon:,, and. 56

58 Each number entered appears n the dsplay. The system tunes to the frequency entered (n ths example: 98.5 Mhz). The FM man menu appears after a bref delay. Entres outsde the frequency range are not possble. Wthn the AM waveband, the nput s restrcted to frequences wthn the respectve frequency ncrement (10 khz). The system selects the nearest vald frequency f a frequency outsde the frequency ncrement s entered. Tunng to a staton on Weather Band Tunng va staton search Seven channels are avalable on the Weather Band. Tunng usng COMAND control unt Swtch to the WB waveband by pressng the WB soft key n the Rado man menu ( page 53). The system tunes to the strongest recevable staton. Press or. Search begns n ascendng or descendng order of frequency. The search stops at the next recevable staton. Tunng on the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the audo dsplay ( page 28). Press j or k. The search stops at the next recevable staton. Audo - Front Cabn Rado operaton Tunng va staton presets The seven strongest channels are sorted n prest 1 to 7 each tme you press the WB soft key. They are accessed usng the number keypad. Press one of the number keys -. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Storng of statons Ten presets each are avalable for the FM and AM waveband. The followng optons are avalable: Manual storng usng number keys ( page 57) Manual storng usng the Presets menu ( page 58) Storng wth Autostore ( page 58) Manual storng usng the number keys - Tune to the staton to be stored ( page 54). Press and hold a number key between and for more than 2 seconds. The staton s now stored n the respectve memory locaton. 57

59 Audo - Front Cabn Rado operaton Manual storng usng the Presets menu Tune to the staton to be stored ( page 54). Press the Presets soft key. The Presets menu appears. Press,, or to select a preset. Press for more than 2 seconds. The staton s now stored n the respectve memory locaton. Storng wth Autostore The Autostore functon places statons nto the Autostore memory, sorted by recepton qualty. The system stores the staton wth the strongest sgnal n preset 1. The Autostore feature stores presets n a separate memory, not n the regular presets seen under the Presets soft key. Therefore the Autostore memory s only a temporary memory. Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 53). Press the Autost. soft key. The Autostore preset lst appears. Use to select the Reprogram Autostore lst entry. Press. The Autostore search begns. After a delay, the new preset assgnment appears. The system tunes to the staton stored on preset 1. A staton can also be tuned-n from the Autostore preset lst ( page 55). 58

60 Audo - Front Cabn CD operaton CD operaton General nformaton CD operaton G Warnng In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should nsert CDs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the audo system only f permtted by road, weather and traffc condtons. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. The CD drve and CD changer are Class 1 laser products. Danger of nvsble laser radaton exsts when the cover s opened or damaged. Do not remove the cover. The CD drve and the CD changer do not contan any parts servceable by the user. For safety reasons, have any necessary servce work performed only by qualfed personnel. Tps on carng for your CDs Only touch the CD on the edges. Clean the CD wth a dry, lnt-free cloth. Wpe the CD a straght lne from the center. Never wpe the CD n a crcular moton. Do not use rubbng alcohol or detergents to clean CDs. Do not expose CDs to heat or drect sunlght. Do not wrte or put labels on CDs. The system may not be able to play audo CDs wth copy protecton. Use only orgnal CDs. Usng coped CDs may cause malfunctons durng playback. Swtchng to CD mode Call up the CD man menu ( page 61). or Load an audo CD nto the CD drve of COMAND. The CD drve n COMAND s desgned to play audo CDs. Loadng a CD G Warnng In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should nsert CDs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the audo system only f permtted by road, weather and traffc condtons. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. 59

61 Audo - Front Cabn CD operaton! Do not attach labels of any type to the CD. They may become detached and damage the drve. Only use CDs whch bear the label shown and that conform to the compact dsc dgtal audo standard (IEC 60908). You can therefore only use CDs wth a maxmum thckness of 1.3 mm. Use of CDs whch do not meet ths standard may cause damage to the CD drve. Do not play sngle CDs (80 mm) wth an adapter.! The CD drve s desgned to play CDs whch correspond to the IEC standard. Therefore only CDs not exceedng a thckness of 1.3 mm can be used. If you nsert thcker data carrers, e.g. ones that have data on both sdes (one sde wth DVD data, the other sde wth audo data), they cannot be ejected; the drve could be damaged. Do not play sngle-cds (80 mm) wth an adapter. Only use 12 cm dameter CDs. The COMAND CD drve may not be able to play audo CDs wth copy protecton. The COMAND CD drve accommodates one CD. The CD slot s located above the dsplay. A CD already loaded must be ejected before nsertng a new CD. Insertng a second CD wth another CD stll loaded wll cause damage to the CD drve not covered by the Maybach Lmted Warranty. Insert a CD nto the slot whle COMAND s swtched ON. Insert the CD face up. COMAND pulls the CD n. If the CD s an audo CD, the system swtches to CD mode. If the CD s an MP3 CD, the system swtches to MP3 mode ( page 67). Ejectng a CD Press. COMAND ejects the CD. Remove the CD from the slot. The CD wll be pulled n agan f t s not removed from the slot wthn approx. 7 seconds. 60

62 CD man menu Call up the Audo man menu ( page 52). Press the CD soft key. The CD man menu appears. The CD soft key s shaded out f no audo CD s loaded. The system wll not swtche to CD mode. Load an audo CD nto the COMAND CD drve ( page 59). The MP3 soft key nstead of the CD soft key s vsble when a MP3 has been loaded. 1 Current track (f ndcated by the CD) 2 Current track (Example: Track 2 of 12) 3 Elapsed track playng tme If no audo CD feature s avalable, the system cannot swtch to CD mode. The message No CD appears brefly. If no audo CD s nserted nto the COMAND CD drve, the system swtches back to the Audo man menu. Load an audo CD nto the COMAND CD drve ( page 59). Selectng a track The followng optons are avalable: Selectng va track skp ( page 61) Selectng va track lst ( page 62) Selectng va manual entry of the track number ( page 62) Selectng va scan search ( page 62) Selectng va track skp On the COMAND control unt Call up the CD man menu ( page 61). Press for forward skppng, or Press for backward skppng. Audo - Front Cabn CD operaton On the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the audo dsplay ( page 28). Press j for forward skppng, or Press k for backward skppng. Forward skppng: The next track s played. Backward skppng: If the track has been playng longer than approx. 10 seconds, the system skps back to the begnnng of the track. If less than 10 seconds have played, the system skps back to the begnnng of the prevous track. 61

63 Audo - Front Cabn CD operaton Selectng va track lst The track lst contans all tracks of the current CD. Only one lst entry s vsble at a tme, t s the number of the track currently played. Selectng va manual entry of the track number Call up the CD man menu ( page 61). Press. The track nput dsplay appears. The number of tracks on the CD s dsplayed. The selected track s played. The CD man menu appears. Selectng va Scan search Durng scan search, each track on the current CD s played for approx. 8 seconds. It stops automatcally at the track lstened to before the scan search was started. It s also possble to end the scan search manually. Press or to select another track from the lst. Press. or Do not change the selecton. The selected track s played. Entry example: Track 1 Press. Entry example: Track 15 Press and n quck successon. Entres beyond the number of avalable tracks on the CD are not possble. Wat approx. 3 seconds after enterng the number. 62

64 Startng Scan search Press the Scan soft key. When you start the scan search, playback opton Normal sequence ( page 63) s actvated automatcally. Termnatng Scan search manually Press the Scan soft key. The track played at the tme of Scan search termnaton remans playng. Fast forward/reverse Call up the CD man menu ( page 61). Press and hold or. To stop, release or. Playback optons The followng optons are avalable: Normal sequence Repeat track Random track Explanaton of the playback optons Normal sequence The tracks are played n the normal sequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). The last track s followed by the frst track of the CD. Repeat track The current track wll be repeated untl ths functon s deactvated. Random track The tracks are played n random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). Audo - Front Cabn Changng playback opton Example: Random track opton Press the Settng soft key. The Settng menu appears. CD operaton Press or to select the Random track menu tem. Press. The opton s actvated. A correspondenng dsplay wll appear n the status bar for all optons expect Normal sequence. An opton wll reman actvated even f the COMAND s swtched OFF and then ON agan. 63

65 Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton MP3 operaton Safety Instructons MP3 operaton G Warnng In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should nsert CDs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the audo system only when road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. G Warnng The CD drve s a Class 1 laser product. There s a danger of nvsble laser radaton when you open or damage the cover. Do not remove the cover. The CD drve does not contan any parts servceable by the user. For safety reasons, have any necessary servce work performed by qualfed personnel. Tps on data storage meda! Do not attach labels of any type to the dscs. They may become detached and damage the drve. Your CD drve has been desgned to play CDs whch correspond to the IEC standard. Therefore only CDs not exceedng a thckness of 1.3 mm can be used. If you nsert thcker data carrers, e.g. ones that have data on both sdes (one sde wth DVD data, the other sde wth audo data), they cannot be ejected and wll damage the drve. Do not play sngle-cds (80 mm) wth an adapter. Only use 12 cm dameter CDs. Tps on carng for your MP3 CDs Only touch the CD on the edges. Clean the CD wth a dry, lnt-free cloth. Wpe the CD a straght lne from the center. Never wpe the CD n a crcular moton. Do not use rubbng alcohol or solvents to clean CDs. Do not expose the CDs to heat or drect sunlght. Do not wrte or put labels on CDs Tps on creatng MP3 CDs CDs, software and hardware for wrtng audo data to CD are wdely avalable. Therefore, we cannot guarantee that COMAND wll be able to play every user-wrtten CD. Problems may be encountered durng playback of user-wrtten CDs wth a storage capacty of more than 700 MB. These CDs do not meet vald standards as of ths prntng. 64

66 Permssble MP3 CDs In MP3 mode COMAND can read CD-R and CD-RW CDs. Permssble fle systems The permtted fle system s ISO9669/Jolet for CD-R and CD-RW. Multsesson dscs Wth multsesson dscs, the content of the frst sesson determnes how COMAND treats the CD. For example, f the frst seson contans data n audo CD format and the second sesson contans data n MP3 format, CO- MAND wll treat the CD as a conventonal audo CD. Fle structure When creatng an MP3 CD, you can organze MP3 tracks nto folders. A folder can also contan addtonal folders. A CD may have a maxmum of 255 folders n total. A maxmum of 255 tracks are permssble per folder. Mathematcally a maxmum of tracks would result. However, ths amount s usually not reached snce MP3 requres approx. 1 MB storage per mnute recorded. Track names and folder names When creatng an MP3 CD, you can assgn names to the MP3 tracks and folders. COMAND uses these names n MP3-mode for the correspondng dsplay. Please note the followng when assgnng track and folder names: Per folder a maxmum of 1800 characters are avalable for ttle and folder names combned. Exceedng ths number, CO- MAND cannot dsplay all ttles and folders. Names must contan at least 1 character. Names may contan up to ffty characters. If a name exceeds ths character lmt, COMAND wll not be able to dsplay t n full. Track names must have the fle extenson mp3. A perod must appear between the track name and the extenson. Example of a correct track name: Track1.mp3. Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton Empty folders or folders contanng data other than MP3 tracks wll not be dsplayed by COMAND. If MP3 fles are stored n the root drectory tself, the root drectory also counts as a folder. COMAND wll then dsplay the root drectory name as a folder name. COMAND does not support ID3 tags. Tps on creatng MP3 tracks Permssble MP3 formats COMAND supports the MPEG1 audo layer 3 format. In everyday speech, ths format has been replaced by the desgnaton MP3. Permssble bt and scan rates Fxed and varable bt rates up to 320 kbps Scan rates from 24 khz - 48 khz 65

67 Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton Tps on copyrght The musc tracks that you can create for play back n MP3 mode are generally copyrght-protected under applcable nternatonal and natonal laws. In many countres, the reproducton of copyrghted materal s not permtted, even f only for personal use, wthout the express pror consent of the copyrght holder. Please check the current copyrght laws for your country and comply wth them. These restrctons do not apply for example to your own compostons and recordngs, or for recordngs for whch authorzaton has been obtaned from the copyrght holder. Swtchng to MP3 mode Call up the MP3 man menu ( page 67). or Insert an MP3 CD nto COMAND. 66 It s recommended to use MP3 tracks wth a bt rate of 128 kbps or hgher and wth a scan rate of 44.1 khz or hgher. Lower rates may mpar qualty. Ths s partcularly true f the Sound functon has been actvated. Loadng a MP3 CD G Warnng In order to avod dstracton whch could lead to an accdent, the drver should nsert CDs wth the vehcle at a standstll and operate the audo system only when road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. The COMAND CD drve holds one CD. The slot for nsertng a CD s located above the dsplay ( page 16).! If a CD s already loaded, t must be ejected before nsertng the new CD. Insertng a second CD n the slot wth another CD stll loaded wll cause damage to the CD drve not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lmted Warranty. Insert a CD nto the CD slot whle COMAND s swtched ON. Insert the CD face up. COMAND pulls the CD n and loads the data. It may take a whle to load the data, dependng on the number of folders and tracks. After loadng, COMAND plays the CD. Ejectng a MP3 CD Press. COMAND ejects the CD. Remove the CD from the slot. The CD wll be pulled n agan f t s not removed from the slot wthn approx. 7 seconds.

68 Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton MP3 man menu Open the Audo man menu ( page 52). Selectng folders If the MP3 tracks are organzed nto folders on the dsc, you can select a folder from the COMAND control unt. Press the MP3 soft key. The MP3 soft key wll only appear f an MP3 CD has been loaded. COMAND loads the data on the CD. It may take a whle to load the data, dependng on the number of folders and tracks contaned on the CD. Once the data has been loaded, the MP3 man menu appears. You wll hear the last track played. 1 Current folder 2 Current track 3 Elapsed track playng tme 4 Track number wthn the current folder/ number of tracks n current folder On MP3 tracks wth varable bt rates, the elapsed track playng tme dsplayed may devate from the actual tme elapsed. The followng optons are avalable: Selectng va extended folder lst Selectng va folder lst Selectng va folder lst The folder lst only contans folders n whch MP3 tracks are stored. Only one folder can be vewed at a tme. 1 Current folder Press or to select a folder. 67

69 Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton Wat approx. 3 seconds wthout changng the selecton. The COMAND changes the folder and loads the data from the new folder. It may take a whle to load the data, dependng on the number of folders and tracks. Selectng va extended folder lst The extended folder lst only contans folders n whch MP3 tracks are stored. In the MP3 man menu ( page 67) press the Folder soft key. The extended folder lst appears. Selectng a track You may select a track n the current folder. The followng optons are avalable: Selectng va manual entry of the track number ( page 69) Selectng va scan search ( page 70) Selectng va track skp Selectng va track lst Selectng va track skp On the COMAND control unt Open the MP3 man menu ( page 67). Press for forward skppng. or Use or to select a folder. Press. The COMAND changes the folder and loads the data from the new folder. It may take a whle to load the data, dependng on the number of folders and tracks. 68

70 Press for backward skppng. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the audo dsplay ( page 14). Press j for forward skppng. or Press k for backward skppng. Forward skppng: The next track s played. Backward skppng: If the track has been playng longer than approx. 10 seconds, the system skps back to the begnnng of the track. If less than 10 seconds have played, the system skps back to the begnnng of the prevous track. Selectng va track lst The track lst contans all tracks n the current folder. Only one track can be vewed at a tme. 1 Current track Use or to select another track from the lst. Press, or wat approx. 3 seconds wthout changng the selecton. The selected track s played. Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton Selectng va manual entry of the track number Open the MP3 man menu ( page 67). Press. The Manual track nput dsplay appears. 1 Number of tracks n the current folder (12 tracks) 69

71 Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton Entry example: Track 1 Press. Entry example: Track 10 Press and n quck successon. Entres beyond the number of avalable tracks n the current folder are not possble. Wat approx. 3 seconds after enterng the number. The selected track s played. Selectng va scan search Scan search s charactersed as follows: Scan search plays each track n the current folder for approx. 8 seconds. Scan search can be ended manually. Scan search automatcally stops at the track lstened to before the scan search was started. Startng scan search In the MP3 man menu ( page 67) press the Scan soft key. The scan search starts. The scan search wll not functon f the current folder only contans one track. When you start the scan search, playback opton Normal sequence s actvated automatcally. The scan search s restrcted to the current folder. Endng scan search manually Press the Scan soft key. The track playng at the tme the scan s ended remans playng. Fast forward/reverse Open the MP3 man menu ( page 67). Press and hold or. To stop release or. Playback optons The followng optons are avalable: Normal sequence The COMAND plays tracks n a folder n successon. Once all the tracks n a folder have been played, COMAND begns playng the track(s) n the next folder on the dsc. Once all the tracks n a folder have been played, the tracks n the next folder are played. Repeat track The current track wll be repeated untl ths functon s deactvated. 70

72 Audo - Front Cabn MP3 operaton Repeat folder The tracks n the current folder wll be repeated untl ths functon s deactvated. The track sequence s the same as the Normal sequence opton. Track mx Ths opton s restrcted to the tracks n the current folder. The tracks are played n random order. Folder mx All tracks on the CD are played n random order. Swtchng the playback opton In the MP3 man menu ( page 67) press the Settng soft key. The Settng menu appears. The sold crcle ndcates whch opton s currently selected. Use or to select a dfferent opton. Press. The opton s swtched on. A correspondng dsplay wll appear n the status bar for all optons except Normal sequence. An opton wll reman actvated even f the COMAND s swtched OFF and then ON agan. 71

73 Audo - Front Cabn Audo AUX operaton Audo AUX operaton An external audo source can be connected to COMAND va the 3.5 mm stereo jack located n the glove box. For further nformaton, please contact your authorzed Maybach Studo. Audo AUX operaton The followng adjustments can be made n AUX mode: Volume ( page 35) Fader and balance ( page 38) Bass and treble ( page 40) Sound functons ( page 41) Swtchng to AUX mode Call up the Audo man menu ( page 52). Press the AUX soft key. The AUX menu appears. The external audo source s made audble, provded t s connected and swtched to playback. Please refer to the respectve operator s manual for the operaton of the external audo source. 72

74 Satellte rado Front Cabn General nformaton Satellte rado operaton

75 Satellte rado Front Cabn General nformaton General nformaton Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. General nformaton Introducton to satellte rado SIRIUS Satellte Rado provdes over 130 channels of dgtal-qualty rado, ncludng 100% commercal-free musc, sports, news, and entertanment. SIRIUS Satellte Rado uses a fleet of hgh-power satelltes to broadcast 24 hours per day, coast-to-coast, n the contguous U.S. Ths dverse, satellte-delvered programmng s avalable for a monthly subscrpton fee. For more nformaton and servce avalablty call the SIRIUS Servce Center, ( page 79) or contact (USA) or (Canada). Program categores The channels are categorzed. Categores allow you to tune to statons broadcastng a certan type of program (category mode) ( page 77). Category selecton ALL contans the staton lst of all recevable channels (channel mode) ( page 77). Note that categores and channels shown n llustratons are dependent on programmng content delvered by the servce provder. Programmng content s subject to change. Therefore, channel and categores shown n llustratons and descrptons contaned n ths manual may dffer from the channels and categores delvered by the servce provder. Satellte rado servce may be unavalable or nterrupted from tme to tme for a varety of reasons, such as envronmental or topographc condtons and other thngs beyond the servce provder's or our control. Servce mght also not be avalable n certan places (e.g., n tunnels, parkng garages, or wthn or next to buldngs) or near other technologes. 74

76 Satellte rado operaton Satellte rado operaton Callng up the SAT man menu Press. Dfferent menus appear dependng on Satellte rado servce actvaton. Pror to actvaton of the Satellte rado servce, After actvaton of Satellte rado servce. Pror to actvaton of the Satellte rado servce The Satellte rado man menu wll appear and dsplays the Weather channel. You cannot select any other staton. Subscrbng to satellte rado Press the Servce soft key to dsplay the Servce Informaton dsplay. The telephone number of the SIRIUS Servce Center and the twelve-dgt electronc seral number (ESN) of the partcular recever are dsplayed. Ths nformaton s requred to call the SIRIUS Servce Center for an actvaton request. Contact the SIRIUS Servce Center at the telephone number dsplayed n the screen. It s also possble to actvate the satellte rado servce onlne. To do so please vst SIRIUS Satellte Rado s webste at (USA) or (Canada). After the connecton s made: Follow the nstructons gven by the operator. The actvaton process takes approxmately 5 to 10 mnutes after callng the SIRIUS Servce Center. Satellte rado Front Cabn Satellte rado operaton If a subscrpton s not ncluded wth system purchase, credt card nformaton s requred to actvate your account. After actvaton of the Satellte rado servce The Satellte rado man menu appears. The rado staton selected last s audble, provded t can be receved. The system wll tune to a default staton f no staton had been selected prevously. Staton nformaton s dsplayed on the man screen and n the center of the status bar. 75

77 Satellte rado Front Cabn Satellte rado operaton Man area, In ths example: POP = selected category ( page 77) I-60 = name of the selected staton Status bar, n ths example: SAT (on the left) = the selected system SAT1 = locaton n the program memory, f the current channel s pre-stored Ch6 = number of the current channel Soft key functons Possble soft keys: Presets shows channels pre-stored n the program memory (up to 10 channels). You can store statons ( page 79) and request stored statons ( page 76). Info shows addtonal text nformaton related to the current channel. Scan s used to start and stop the scan search ( page 78). Servce dsplays a screen showng the telephone number of the SIRIUS Servce Center and your personal electronc seral number (ESN). You can also adjust the followng: Bass and treble ( page 40) Balance and fader ( page 38) Sound functons ( page 41) Volume (not on soft keys) ( page 35) Selectng a staton The followng optons are avalable: Selectng a staton usng the selected category ( page 78), Tunng va staton presets ( page 76), Tunng va scan search ( page 78). Tunng va manual channel nput ( page 77). Tunng category lst ( page 77). Tunng va staton presets Ten Satellte rado staton presets are avalable. Access the presets va number keys or va the Presets menu. The presets memory s empty at frsttme actvaton of the system. Accessng va number keys Press one of the number keys -. The system wll tune to the staton stored under ths number. 76

78 Accessng va Presets menu Press the Presets soft key. The Presets lst appears. Press or to choose a preset and press, or Press one of the number keys -. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Tunng va manual channel nput Example: Tunng n channel 12 Press. Press and. The system tunes to channel 12. If an entry s made and such a channel s not avalable, the message Channel unavalable appears. The channel selected last contnues to play. Tunng va the program category lst The category lst contans all currently recevable categores of programs. It s sorted alphabetcally. Only one entry s vsble at a tme. The entry appears at the top of the man screen. Selectng a category Example 1: category ALL Press or to select the category ALL from the lst. Satellte rado Front Cabn Satellte rado operaton The staton lst contans all recevable channels (channel mode). When swtchng COMAND OFF/ON, the dsplayed category s reset to ALL. Example 2: category POP Use or to select the category POP from the lst. If the staton lstened to before was of POP category, the channel remans tuned. Otherwse the system swtches to the staton of POP category that was selected last n the category. 77

79 Satellte rado Front Cabn Satellte rado operaton The system wll automatcally swtch to a staton of POP category f the currently selected staton s not of the POP category. Otherwse, the currently selected staton remans tuned. Tunng a staton wthn the selected category The channels dentfed for the currently selected category are sorted numercally by channel number, whch appear n the status bar one at a tme. Tunng usng COMAND control unt Press or. The search proceeds n ascendng order, or Press or. The search proceeds n descendng order and stops at the frst recevable staton. Usng or s followed by a short delay before the change occurs. Usng and changes the channel mmedately. Tunng on the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the Satellte rado dsplay ( page 28). Press j. The search proceeds n ascendng order, or Press k. The search proceeds n descendng order and stops at the frst recevable staton. Tunng va Scan search Scan Search s characterzed as follows: Scan search plays a channel for approx. 8 seconds and then skps to the next channel wthn the current category. Scan search can be termnated manually. Scan search stops automatcally at the staton that was playng when scan search was started. Press the Scan soft key. The scan search starts. Press the Scan soft key agan. The scan search stops. Obtanng addtonal text nformaton Addtonal text nformaton (artst, ttle, album, etc.) related to the current channel can be dsplayed. Press the Info soft key. 78

80 Satellte rado Front Cabn Satellte rado operaton Storng of statons Two optons are avalable: Storage usng the number keys Storage usng the Memory menu Storng va number keys Press and hold a number key between and for more than 2 seconds. The currently selected staton s stored n the correspondng preset locaton. When storng a staton out of the category ALL, later selecton of ths channel does not lead nto the category mode. Storng va Presets menu Press the Presets soft key. The Presets lst appears. Use or to select a preset locaton. Press the Presets soft key, or Press for more than 2 seconds. The currently selected staton s stored n the correspondng preset locaton. Callng the SIRIUS Servce Center Press the Servce soft key. The telephone number of the SIRIUS Servce Center and the twelve-dgt electronc seral number (ESN) of your SAT recever appear. It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS Servce Center f, for example: you want to cancel the subscrpton, or to re-subscrbe at a later date, you forget to pay the bll, or you sell the car to another person. 79

81 Satellte rado Front Cabn Satellte rado operaton 80

82 Telephone Front Cabn Important notes Telephone operaton Phone book SMS (Mal)

83 Telephone Front Cabn Important notes Important notes Important notes Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Safety Instructons G Warnng Some jursdctons prohbt the drver from usng a cellular telephone whle drvng. Whether or not prohbted by law, for safety reasons, the drver should not use the cellular telephone whle the vehcle s n moton. Stop the vehcle n a safe locaton before placng or answerng a call. If you nonetheless choose to use the telephone whle drvng, please use the handsfree devce and be sure to pay attenton to the traffc stuaton at all tmes. Use the telephone only 1 when permtted by road, weather, and traffc condtons. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approx. 50 km/h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approx. 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requrements G Warnng Never operate rado transmtters requrng an nternal or external antenna (.e. wthout beng connected to an external antenna) from nsde the vehcle whle the engne s runnng. Dong so could lead to malfuncton of the vehcle's electronc system, possbly causng an accdent and personal njury. Tps on telephone operaton Once the cell phone specfed for your Maybach vehcle s nserted nto the cradle n the front cabn, t can be operated: usng the cell phone tself, usng the COMAND control unt, usng the multfuncton steerng wheel, or usng the voce control Descrptons n ths Operator s Manual presume that the cell phone s nserted nto the telephone cradle. 82

84 Ths operaton manual descrbes operaton of the telephone usng the CO- MAND control unt and the multfuncton steerng wheel. Unless otherwse specfed, the descrptons and llustrated dsplays refer to the CO- MAND control unt. Operaton of the cell phone and voce control system are explaned n separate operaton gudes.! Rado transmtters, such as a portable telephone or a CB rado, should be used nsde the vehcle only f they are connected to a separate external antenna approved by us for use on Maybach vehcles. Please read chapter "Telephone" before attemptng to operate the telephone feature. Always drve wth extreme cauton when operatng the telephone hands-free. For safety reasons, the cell telephone handsets should not be used to place or receve a call whle drvng. If the sgnal s very weak (dsplay n the status bar): Wat untl recepton mproves before placng a call. Close the wndows and reduce all external nose as much as possble when usng hands-free operaton. Make sure that the ar vents are not ponted n the drecton of the mcrophones located n the overhead control panel near the rear vew mrror. Adjust ar vents and/or reduce blower speed f necessary. A bref dsconnecton from the moble network s not a malfuncton, as ths can occur when the network swtches areas. The phone automatcally attempts to agan sgn on wth a network. If the message Enter unlock code s dsplayed, enter the unlock code ( page 87). Only then wll you be able to use all the telephone functons. You wll stll be able to make "911" emergency calls ( page 85) f the telephone s locked. The telephone cannot, or not yet, be used n the followng stuatons: The telephone s already unlocked, but t s not yet regstered wth the network. Telephone Front Cabn Important notes The message NO SERV appears n the status bar. The telephone automatcally attempts to regster wth a network. If there s no network avalable, 911 emergency calls can NOT be placed. If you try to place an outgong call, the message Call not possble s dsplayed temporarly. If the message Telephone beng actvated, please wat s dsplayed, If the message Please nsert phone s dsplayed. Insert the cell phone nto the cradle (see Vehcle Operator s Manual). 83

85 Telephone Front Cabn Important notes Notes about Bluetooth connectons Many of the Maybach approved moble phones, cradles and adaptors avalable for use n your vehcle utlze Bluetooth technology to communcate wth each other and the vehcle. Dependng on your phone brand and model, the number of n-vehcle or on-dsplay COMAND telephone features supported va Bluetooth communcaton, and thus avalable for your use, may vary. The descrptons and llustratons n ths secton are based on the use of fully compatble Maybach approved moble phones and cradles that do not utlze Bluetooth technology to communcate wth each other. If your vehcle s equpped wth ntegrated Bluetooth functonalty, a Bluetooth capable moble phone, headset, Laptop, PDA, etc. s requred to utlze those features. For addtonal nformaton about Maybach approved Bluetooth moble phones and related accessores please contact the Maybach Assstance Center at FOR-MAY- Bach or your nearest authorzed Maybach Studo. 84

86 Telephone operaton Telephone operaton Swtchng the phone ON/OFF Swtchng ON The telephone s swtched ON automatcally when COMAND s actvated. The cell phone must be readly nserted nto the cradle. If COMAND s swtched ON, the swtched off telephone can also be swtched ON manually: Press and hold for a few seconds untl the telephone s swtched ON. The Telephone man menu appears on the dsplay ( page 88). One of the the followng messages could also appear: Please nsert phone Insert the cell phone nto the cradle (see Vehcle Operator s Manual). Please nsert SIM card. Ths message appears only when usng a GSM cell phone. Insert a SIM card (see Telephone Operaton Gude). Swtchng OFF In the Telephone man menu ( page 88), press and hold for longer than 2 seconds, or Swtch COMAND OFF ( page 34). The telephone swtches OFF after a onemnute delay. If a call s n progress durng ths tme, the telephone swtches OFF approx. one mnute after the call s termnated. If a call s n progress (hands-free), you cannot swtch the COMAND OFF, s dsabled. Telephone Front Cabn "911" emergency calls Telephone operaton G Warnng The "911" emergency call system s a publc servce. Usng t wthout due cause s a crmnal offense. The followng condtons must preval for a "911" emergency call: cell phone readly nserted telephone swtched ON avalable cell phone network If you cannot make an emergency call, you wll have to ntate rescue measures yourself. The 911 emergency call wll also functon f the telephone s locked. Placng an emergency call An emergency call can be placed usng the cell phone or the COMAND control unt. Usng the cell phone (see Telephone Operaton Gude). 85

87 Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton Usng the COMAND control unt durng PIN or unlock code entry Press the 911 soft key. The system opens an nqury menu promptng f you want to dal a 911 call. The selecton marker should be on Yes. If necessary, press to select Yes. Press to confrm Yes f you want to place the 911 emergency call. The telephone establshes the connecton, a rngng tone s audble. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. If you do not want to place the emergency call: Press to select No when the nqury menu appears. Press to confrm No. Usng the COMAND control unt after PIN and unlock code entry Press repeatedly untl the Telephone man menu appears. In successon, press the number keys,, and. Press. The telephone establshes the connecton, wth audble rngng tone. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. Enterng the PIN (only GSM) The PIN can be entered on the cell phone tself (see Telephone Operaton Gude). The PIN protects the telephone aganst unauthorzed use. Your PIN s found n the telephone servce provder's documentaton. Commt your PIN to memory. Most telephone functons are not avalable before enterng the PIN. 86

88 Press the correspondng number key - for each dgt. In case of erroneous entry, delete the last or more dgts: Press the Delete soft key as often as requred. Once all dgts have been entered, press the OK soft key. If the nput s correct, the telephone wll log tself nto the network. The telephone cannot be used before t s logged-n. If the nput s ncorrect, message Wrong PIN number wll appear brefly. Re-enter the PIN. Three consecutve ncorrect entres wll block the use of the SIM card. Message SIM card blocked appears brefly. The PUK has to be entered. (see Telephone Operaton Gude) Enterng the unlock code The unlock code protects the telephone aganst unauthorzed use. The unlock code can be actvated on the telephone (see Telephone Operaton Gude). Memorze the unlock code. The telephone functons are avalable only after entry of the correct unlock code. The system swtches back to the last mode f the unlock code s not entered wthn 8 seconds after you are prompted to do so. Example: Unlock code 2307 In sequence, press the number keys,,, and. Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton In case of erroneous entry, delete the last or more dgts: Press the Delete soft key as often as requred. After enterng all dgts, press or the OK soft key. All telephone functons are avalable f the correct number has been entered. After regsterng, READY or ROAMING appears n the center of the status bar. The unlock code has to be entered agan f the orgnal entry was ncorrect. Swtchng to telephone mode When COMAND s swtched ON, swtchng to telephone mode from any other operaton mode takes place as follows: On the COMAND control unt Press. The Telephone man menu opens ( page 88). On the multfuncton steerng wheel See ( page 28). The COMAND unt automatcally swtches to the telephone mode to receve an ncomng call. 87

89 Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton Telephone man menu G Warnng Some jursdctons prohbt the drver from usng a cellular telephone whle drvng. Whether or not prohbted by law, for safety reasons, the drver should not use the cellular telephone whle the vehcle s n moton. Stop the vehcle n a safe locaton before placng or answerng a call. If you nonetheless choose to use the telephone whle drvng, please use the handsfree devce and be sure to pay attenton to the traffc stuaton at all tmes. Use the telephone 1 only when permtted by road, weather, and traffc condtons. 1 Observe all legal requrements Press. The Telephone man menu appears. 88 Telephone status nformaton s dsplayed on the rght end of the status bar. The nformaton s also dsplayed n Navgaton mode (only n map dsplays). The followng dsplays are possble: READY = telephone s logged nto your moble communcatons home network and ready for use, ROAMING = telephone s logged nto a moble communcatons network outsde your home network, NO SERV = no network avalable, = telephone sgnal strength, = call actve ( page 93). Other messages could also appear: If message Please nsert phone, Please nsert SIM card appears, see chapter "Swtchng the phone ON / OFF" ( page 85) If message Please enter PIN appears, see "Enterng the PIN" ( page 86) If message Enter unlock code appears, see "Enterng unlock code" ( page 87) Selectable soft keys and optons soft key Opens the phone book ( page 94), Recvd.# soft key Opens the lst of accepted and mssed calls ( page 90), Daled# soft key Opens the daled calls lst ( page 91), SMS soft key Provdes access to the SMS menu ( page 97), Entry of a phone number ( page 89). If a lst s empty, the correspondng soft key s wthout functon and appears shaded out. Answerng an ncomng call The rngng tone s audble n the event of an ncomng call. The call screen pops up on the current dsplay.

90 If the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster s set to telephone mode, the call screen also appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The caller s number appears only f t s transmtted. The caller s name appears only f the number and the name are stored n the phone book ( page 94). Answerng calls On the COMAND control unt Press. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Press s. The call s actve. Communcaton s conducted va the hands-free system. The call volume can be adjusted ( page 35). For other user functons, see "Actve call" ( page 93). Endng or refusng a call On the COMAND control unt Press. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Press t. It s also possble to accept, refuse or end a call from the cell phone (see Telephone Operaton Gude). Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton Outgong call / Dalng a phone number The desred phone number has to be entered when placng an outgong call. The followng optons are avalable: Drect entry of a phone number ( page 89), Intatng Redal ( page 90), selectng an entry from the lst of accepted and mssed calls ( page 90), selectng an entry from the daled calls lst ( page 91), usng speed dal ( page 92), or openng of the phone book and selectng an entry ( page 95). Enterng a phone number Open the Telephone man menu ( page 88). Press - to enter the phone number. Deletng the last or more dgts n case of an erroneous entry: Press the Delete soft key as often as requred. or 89

91 Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton Press on the COMAND control unt or t on the multfuncton steerng wheel. Ths deletes the entre entry. After enterng the phone number press. The telephone dals the entered number. The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. Communcaton s conducted va the hands-free system. The volume can be adjusted ( page 35). For other user functons, see Actve call ( page 93). Intatng Redal On the COMAND control unt Immedate redalng of the number daled last can be ntated: Press n the Telephone man menu twce. The telephone establshes the connecton usng the number daled last. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the Telephone man dsplay ( page 28). Press s twce. The telephone establshes the connecton usng the number daled last. When pressng s only once, the daled calls lst appears n the multfuncton dsplay ( page 91). In both cases the telephone ntates the call. The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. Communcaton s conducted va the hands-free system. The volume can be adjusted ( page 35). For other user functons, see Actve call ( page 93). Accepted and mssed calls After swtchng to telephone operaton, COMAND can dsplay the number of mssed calls n the status bar. COMAND automatcally establshes a lst of accepted and mssed calls. Ths lst s composed of up to 10 entres. The lst of accepted and mssed calls can be opened, an entry can be selected and the call can be returned. Selectng an entry from the lst of accepted and mssed calls Openng of lst Press the Recvd.# soft key n the Telephone man menu ( page 88). If no calls have been receved yet the Recvd.# soft key s shaded out and wthout functon The lst appears wth the last call hghlghted. The lst s sorted chronologcally, the last accepted or mssed call s dsplayed at the top of the lst. 90

92 Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton The lst shows up to ten calls you receved last. It s a combned lstng of both accepted and mssed calls. The lst does not show or specfy whch calls were accepted and whch ones were mssed. Swtchng lst dsplays Press the 123 soft key. Ths swtches the lst to number dsplay, or Press the ABC soft key. Ths swtches the lst to name dsplay. Selectng a lst entry and establshng the connecton: Press or to select the desred entry. Press. The telephone ntates the call to the selected number. Daled calls Selectng an entry from the lst of daled calls COMAND automatcally establshes a lst of the last 10 daled calls. The lst s sorted chronologcally, the last outgong call s dsplayed at the top. On the COMAND control unt Openng the lst: Press the Daled# soft key n the Telephone man menu ( page 88). The lst appears wth the last outgong call hghlghted. Ths lst s composed of up to 10 entres. If no calls have been placed yet the Daled # soft s shaded out and wthout functon. Swtchng lst dsplay: Press the 123 soft key: Ths swtches the lst to number dsplay. If a name n the phone book s stored wth the number of the hghlghted call t s shown n the status bar. Press the ABC soft key: Ths swtches the lst to name dsplay. The number n the phone book that belongs to the hghlghted name s shown n the status bar. 91

93 Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton Selectng a lst entry and establshng the connecton: Press or to select the desred entry. Press. The telephone ntates the call to the selected number. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Openng the lst: Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the Telephone man dsplay ( page 28). Press s once. If you press s twce, the telephone wll mmedately establsh a connecton wth the phone number daled last. The last daled call s dsplayed on the multfuncton dsplay. Selectng a lst entry and establshng the connecton: Press j or k repeatedly untl the desred entry s shown on the multfuncton dsplay. Press s. The telephone ntates the call to the selected number. Speed dal On the cell phone On the cell phone telephone numbers can be stored n and retreved from the speed dal memory ( Telephone Operaton Gude). You can retreve the entres of the speed dal memory va COMAND. On the COMAND control unt Open the Telephone man menu ( page 88). Press and hold a number key between and for more than approx. 3 seconds. The telephone establshes the connecton wth the stored number. Establshng a connecton On the COMAND control unt After enterng the phone number ( page 89), press. On the multfuncton steerng wheel After enterng the phone number ( page 89), press s. In both cases the telephone ntates the call. The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. Communcaton s to be conducted va the hands-free system. The volume can be adjusted ( page 35). For other user functons see Actve call ( page 93). Endng a call On the COMAND control unt Press. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Press t. 92

94 Actve call The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. The call dsplay appears. The duraton of the call s dsplayed n the status bar. If the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster s set to telephone mode, the call screen also appears n the multfuncton dsplay. The followng functons are avalable durng a call: Termnaton of the actve call ( page 93) ON/OFF swtchng of the hands-free mcrophone ( page 93) Endng of an actve call On the COMAND control unt Press. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Press t. Telephone Front Cabn Telephone operaton Swtchng the hands-free mcrophone ON/OFF The soft key Mc Off shows the status of the mcrophone. Mcrophone OFF: soft key = Mcrophone ON: soft key = Press the Mc Off soft key. Ths swtches the mcrophone OFF or ON. The color of the letterng changes accordngly. The other party cannot hear you f the mcrophone s swtched OFF; however, you can hear the other party. Transmttng number sequences Answerng machnes or other devces could possbly be controlled through number sequences (e.g. remote query functons). Whle connected, press one of the approprate number keys - for each dgt. You can also transmt the characters and (#). 93

95 Telephone Front Cabn Phone book Phone book Phone book The phone book contans all entres of the cell phone memory. If a GSM phone s used the phone book contans all entres of the telephone phone book. Openng the phone book On the COMAND control unt Press the soft key n the Telephone man menu ( page 88). The phone book appears on the dsplay; the frst entry s hghlghted. If no numbers are stored n the phone book, the soft key s shaded out and wthout functon. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the Telephone dsplay ( page 28). Press j or k. A phone book entry appears on the multfuncton dsplay; scroll up or down as requred. COMAND phone book dsplay An example dsplay of the phone book s llustrated above. It shows a lst of the phone book entres whose names begn wth the letter B. Dsplayed n the status bar s the number of the hghlghted name, n ths example Varous cons may be assgned to the phone numbers, dependng on the entry made on the telephone: Home number Work number Fax number Man number Moble number Pager number The name of the category assgned to the phone number, e.g. Home, appears n the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster. 94

96 The followng optons are now avalable: Swtchng between number and name ( page 95). Selectng a phone book entry and establshng a call ( page 95). Addng a spoken names to a phone book entry ( page 96). Deletng a phone book entry ( page 96). Swtchng between number and name Open the phone book from COMAND ( page 94). Press the 123 soft key. Ths swtches the dsplay to number dsplay. The name of the hghlghted entry s shown n the status bar; or Press the ABC soft key. Ths swtches the dsplay to name dsplay. The number of the hghlghted entry s shown n the status bar. Selectng a phone book entry and establshng the connecton On the COMAND control unt Open the phone book man menu ( page 94). As descrbed n secton COMAND phone book dsplay ( page 94), a lst of phone book entres appears, begnnng wth a specfc frst letter (ntal). Changng ntals: Press or once or repeatedly. Each tme the key s pressed the dsplay changes to the next letter up or down. At the end of the lst of letters s the category Other. Ths category combnes all entres wthout a name, or entres whose names start wth a specal character (e.g. * or #). Telephone Front Cabn Selectng an entry: Phone book If necessary, change the ntal letter ( page 95). Select an entry. You can scroll through the lst actuatng or. If you press and hold ether one of the keys the scrollng up or down accelerates. Establshng a connecton: Press. The telephone ntates the connecton wth the approprate number. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Swtch the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster to the Telephone man dsplay ( page 88). Press j or k repeatedly untl the desred entry s shown n the multfuncton dsplay. Press s. The telephone ntates the call to the selected number. 95

97 Telephone Front Cabn Phone book Addng spoken names to a phone book entry You can add up to 20 spoken names to each phone book entry. Va the voce control system you can dal a number by speakng a name. Select a phone book entry ( page 95). Press the New soft key. The voce control system prompts you to speak the name. Speak the name. The voce control system prompts you to speak the name agan. Repeat the name. The name s stored. Deletng a phone book entry Select the entry to be deleted va COMAND ( page 95). Press the Delete soft key. The delete prompt s dsplayed. Press to select the menu tem Yes. Press. The entry s deleted. 96

98 SMS (Mal) SMS (Mal) SMS (Short Message Servce) messages can be receved f SMS s avalable from your servce provder. Receved messages are saved n folder SMS nbox ( page 97). Incomng new messages are ndcated by the symbol n the status bar. Symbol appears n the status bar f the SMS memory s full. In addton, a correspondng message s dsplayed when the folder s opened. SMS nbox Open the Telephone man menu ( page 88). The folder SMS nbox appears. If no SMS messages have been receved the SMS soft key s wthout functon and therefore shaded out. The SMS nbox shows the lst of receved messages. The lst s sorted chronologcally, the last message receved s dsplayed at the top of the lst. The correspondng date and tme appears n the status bar when the selected message has been receved. Press or to select another message. Telephone Front Cabn SMS (Mal) The symbol at the begnnng of a lst entry ndcates that the message has not been read. The SMS nbox offers the followng optons: Swtchng between subject and sender. Readng a message ( page 98). Deletng a message ( page 98). Swtchng between subject and sender The ncomng SMS can be dsplayed by the sender or the subject. Selecton of the sender prompts the system to dsplay the telephone number. In the SMS nbox ( page 97), press the Subject soft key: The frst characters of the message text appear, or Press the SMS soft key. 97

99 Telephone Front Cabn SMS (Mal) n the SMS nbox, press the Sender soft key. The name(s) or phone number(s) of the message sender(s) appear(s). The sender s number only appears f t has been transmtted. The sender s name only appears f, n addton, the number and the name are stored n the phone book ( page 94). Readng a message In the SMS nbox ( page 97), press or to select a message. Press. The message text appears. To scroll through the message text, press or as requred. Swtchng between content and sender Press the Content soft key. The sender s name appears f t s saved n the phone book. If not, only the phone number appears; or Press the Sender soft key. The message text appears. Deletng a message In the SMS nbox ( page 97), press or to select the message to be deleted. Press the Delete soft key. A delete prompt s dsplayed. Press to select the menu tem Yes. Press. The message s deleted. Extng from the SMS menu Press the Back soft key. Ths returns you to the Telephone man menu. 98

100 Navgaton Front Cabn Important notes Navgaton man menu Destnaton nput Route gudance Durng route gudance Last destnaton and destnaton memory POIs (Ponts of Interest) Software update

101 Navgaton Front Cabn Important notes Important notes Important notes Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Safety nstructons G Warnng For safety reasons, you should only enter a destnaton when the vehcle s statonary. When the vehcle s n moton, a passenger should enter the destnaton. Study manual and select route before drvng. Do not watch dsplay screen or operate keys whle the vehcle s n moton - let voce announcements gude you. Stop at a safe locaton before usng keys or makng correctons. Traffc regulatons always have prorty over any route recommendatons gven. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approx. 50 km/ h), your car covers a dstance of 44 feet (approx. 14 m) every second. The route calculated by COMAND s a recommendaton on how to best reach your selected destnaton. Durng route gudance, you wll not receve nformaton on: Traffc lghts, Stop and yeld sgns, Parkng or stoppng zones, One-way streets, Narrow brdges, or other traffc regulaton data. You should therefore always strctly observe traffc regulatons whle drvng. Drve carefully and always obey traffc laws and road sgns, even f they contradct COMAND nstructons. G Warnng The Navgaton DVD module contans a Class 1 laser product. There s a danger of nvsble laser radaton f the cover s opened or damaged. Do not remove the cover. The Navgaton DVD module does not contan any parts servceable by the user. For safety reasons, have any necessary servce work performed only by qualfed personnel. 100

102 Navgaton DVD COMAND calculates the route usng data stored on the navgaton DVD. Only Maybach navgaton DVDs should be used; other DVDs or usng CDs wll not work. Usng other navgaton DVDs or CDs could cause malfunctons or software damage. Calculaton errors may occur due to changes n local traffc patterns (e.g. road works) and/or ncomplete data. Thus the recommended route may devate from the deal route. The data stored on the DVD only reflects local condtons at the tme of DVD producton. DVD maps do not cover all areas nor all routes wthn an area. Loadng/ejectng the DVD The DVD s loaded nto (and ejected from) the navgaton module. The navgaton module s located on the left-hand sde of the trunk. 1 Ejectng DVDs 2 DVD slot! The DVD drve s desgned to play DVDs of IEC standard. Therefore only DVDs not exceedng a thckness of 1.3 mm can be used. Thcker DVDs, e.g. DVDs wth data stored on both sdes (one sde DVD, the other sde Audo data), cannot be ejected; the drve could be damaged. Loadng Navgaton Front Cabn Important notes Insert the DVD nto the DVD slot 2 face up. The navgaton computer pulls the DVD n. Ejectng Press untl the navgaton computer ejects the DVD. Travellng abroad The navgaton DVD covers the contnental U.S., Hawa and Canada. Contact your authorzed Maybach Studo or the Maybach Assstance Center at FOR-MAYBach n the U.S. or at n Canada for avalablty of correspondng DVDs. Change the navgaton DVD ( page 101). 101

103 Navgaton Front Cabn Important notes Route gudance wth GPS GPS (Global Postonng System) sgnals receved make t possble to determne the current vehcle poston. Devatons from the actual poston may occur f the recepton of GPS sgnals s dsturbed e. g. n parkng garages and tunnels f road condtons are bad dependng on the vehcle s locaton T Route gudance after vehcle transport If your vehcle has been transported by a car, tran or ferry, COMAND may requre some tme to fnd ts exact poston. COMAND may ssue voce announcements not suted to your actual poston. Movng the vehcle a few yards s typcally enough to remedy the stuaton. The navgaton DVD must be loaded n the navgaton computer ( page 101). Whle determnng the exact poston, route gudance s subject to the followng restrctons: COMAND does not output voce announcements. The dsplay OFF ROAD and an arrow ndcatng the drecton of the destnaton appears nstead of the detaled navgaton dsplays. Once the system s correctly repostoned, route gudance contnues wth voce announcements and detaled navgaton dsplays. Trp nterrupton durng route gudance Trp nterrupton means parkng the vehcle and swtchng COMAND OFF. Trp contnuaton means trp contnuaton wth COMAND swtched ON. The followng nstructons have to be followed when nterruptng, and later contnung, a trp whle route gudance s actvated: Contnuaton of the trp wthn 2 hours after nterrupton: The system automatcally resumes route gudance. Contnuaton of the trp between 2 and 12 hours after nterrupton: 102

104 Contnuaton of the trp after more than 12 hours of nterrupton: Route gudance must be restarted. or Select the destnaton from the Last destnatons memory ( page 135) Re-enter the destnaton ( page 109). Selecton lsts Some menus provde lsts from whch you can select an tem. Example: Menu to select a street If, as shown n the example, you can see the Page soft keys, then you can use the soft keys to scroll up or down the lst, page by page. As soon as you reach the begnnng or end of a lst, the soft key s deactvated. Navgaton Front Cabn Important notes You can select a lst tem usng the or key. 103

105 Navgaton Front Cabn Navgaton man menu Navgaton man menu Navgaton man menu Callng up the Navgaton man menu Press. The Navgaton man menu appears, f no route gudance s actve. If route gudance s actve, a prompt s dsplayed nstead, askng f a prevous route gudance s to be cancelled ( page 121). Press or to select a menu tem. Press, or Press one of the soft keys. The selected menu or the selected soft key functon appears. Selectable menu tems Contnue route gudance: Contnues a cancelled route gudance, Ths menu tem appears only f the route gudance had prevously been nterrupted ( page 121), and less than 30 mnutes have expred snce trp nterrupton, or f the trp was nterrupted and s to be contnued 2-12 hours after nterrupton ( page 102). Destnaton memory: Destnatons can be selected from the Destnaton memory ( page 136), Destnaton entry: Provdes access to the Destnaton entry menu ( page 109), Last destnatons: Destnatons reached prevously can be selected from the Last destnatons destnaton memory ( page 136). Last destnatons can be selected only f destnatons are already stored n the system ( page 136). POIs: (Ponts of Interest) Provdes access to POIs nput ( page 138). POIs nclude stops at gas statons, arports, rest areas, hosptals, etc. 104

106 Selectable soft keys Home soft key: Provdes access to the nput of a home address ( page 108). Mode soft key: Provdes access to the route mode settng for the next route gudance cycle ( page 105). Settng soft key: Provdes access to settngs adjustng the acoustcs of voce announcements (treble, bass, volume, balance and fader) ( page 105). Avodng certan road types Certan road types to be avoded can be defned for the system s route calculaton. Press the Mode soft key n the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). The Settng menu for road types to be avoded appears. Press or to select an opton. Press. Ths wll swtch the opton ON or OFF. Empty square = opton OFF Sold square = opton ON Several optons can be actvated. Upon completon, press the Back soft key. Navgaton Front Cabn Navgaton man menu Adjustng the acoustcs for voce announcements The followng acoustcs crtera for voce announcements can be adjusted: Bass / Treble ( page 106). Balance / Fader ( page 106). Volume ( page 106). Press the Settng soft key n the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). The Settng menu appears. 105

107 Navgaton Front Cabn Navgaton man menu Settng bass / treble Press the Bass or Treble soft key n the Settng menu. Press or. The bass or treble settngs can be adjusted. Press, or the Back soft key and wat untl the dsplay changes. The new settng s actvated (stored). Settng balance and fader Press the Bal/Fad soft key n the Settngs menu. A cross-har cursor appears. The vertcal lne represents the balance settng. The horzontal lne represents the fader settng. Press or. The cursor moves horzontally, adjustng the balance accordngly, or Press or. The cursor moves vertcally, adjustng the fader accordngly. The cursor can be moved smultaneously n vertcal and horzontal drecton (dagonally) usng and. Press, or the Back soft key, or Wat untl the dsplay changes. The new settng s actvated (stored). Adjustng the volume Automatcally generated voce announcements are supermposed over any other actve audo source. The volume dfference s adjustable. Ths settng serves to lower the volume of the currently actve audo source whle the announcement s beng made. In the Settng menu ( page 105), press Nav.Vol. Use ths menu to set the volume dfference. The sold crcle shows the current settng. Press the or key to select the desred settng. Press. The new settng s stored and actvated. 106

108 Destnaton nput Enterng data Destnaton nput Enterng characters For character entry, the 12 button keypad or the keypad menu can be used. For more convenent entry, Maybach offers only avalable characters from the character set based on your selectons and the data stored on the navgaton DVD. The character selected appears magnfed or black. The system wll complete the entry f the nput matches data stored on the navgaton DVD. Enterng a character va keypad menu Use,,,, or to select a character Press. The character s entered. Enterng a character va 12 button keypad Use the - keys to enter a character. A key must be pressed once or several tmes n quck successon. After pressng the frst tme, the character dsplay appears. Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput You can see whch characters can be entered when usng the keys. Each addtonal depresson moves you to the next avalable character. The character selected appears black. Wat untl the character dsplay dsappears, or press. The character s entered. Deletng a character Press the Delete soft key, f necessary. The character last accepted by the system s deleted. Do not confuse the Delete soft key (deleton of the last character) wth the Back soft key (deleton of the complete entry). Confrmng the data entry After enterng all the characters data entry must be confrmed. Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds to confrm the entry; or Use or to select the ok symbol and press. 107

109 Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput The ok symbol can only be selected f the system has recognzed data entry. Enterng a home address One frequently used destnaton address can be establshed as the Home address. Call up the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). Press the Home soft key. A message No home address stored appears or f a home address has already been establshed, the home address appears. To start route gudance to the establshed home address press. To enter or change the home address, press the Change soft key. The Navgaton man menu wth menu tems to change the home address appears. Selectable menu tems Destnaton memory: You can select destnatons from the Destnaton memory ( page 136) only f destnatons have already been stored. Destnaton entry: You can enter a destnaton manually the Destnaton entry menu ( page 109). Last destnatons: You can select from the lst of last destnatons ( page 136) only f the system has already stored destnatons. POIs You can nput POIs (ponts of nterest), for example gas statons, arports or hosptals. Current locaton Provdes access to save the current locaton as home address ( page 108) or select a home address usng the map ( page 108). Savng current locaton as home address Use or to select the Current locaton menu tem and press. To save the dsplayed address as home address, press. Select a home address usng the map Use or to select the Current locaton menu tem and press. 108

110 Press the Map soft key. Proceed as descrbed under Movng the map and selectng destnaton ( page 115). or To store the selected destnaton as home address, press. Destnaton entry menu Call up the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). Press or to select the Destnaton entry menu tem. Press. The Destnaton entry menu appears. The destnaton dsplayed last can now be adopted ( page 110), or another locaton can be entered ( page 110). Enterng a destnaton Call up the Destnaton entry menu. The Destnaton entry menu represents the startng pont. Besdes enterng the name of a cty, the followng soft keys are avalable for selectng a destnaton: Map soft key: Allows access to destnaton nput drectly va road map ( page 115). Regon soft key: For access to the regon nput ( page 109). Street soft key: Allows access to nput of the destnaton street ( page 111). CtyCtr soft key: Allows access to the selecton of a cty secton (center) ( page 111). POIs soft key: For access to the POI nput (Ponts of nterest) ( page 138). Lst soft key: Allows selectng a destnaton cty from a cty lst ( page 110). Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput The Street, CtyCtr, or POIs soft key functon refer to the cty on dsplay. If you wsh to choose global POIs not referng to a cty ( page 138). Selectng the regon In the Destnaton entry menu ( page 109) the regon currently selected s ndcated by the regon code n the status bar. To change the regon press the Regon soft key. The regon lst appears. Press or to select a regon. Press. 109

111 Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput Selectng a dfferent regon deletes the cty last entered. The frst cty of the newly selected regon appears (n alphabetcal order). Enterng a cty The Destnaton entry menu ( page 109) represents the startng pont. Enter cty (USA) appears on the dsplay n the status bar. The characters n parenthess ndcate the selected regon ( page 109). Acceptng the dsplayed destnaton Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds. Do not confuse the key wth the the ok symbol n the man screen. Enterng a dfferent cty Use the keypad menu or the 12 buttton keypad to enter the data of the cty ( page 107). After enterng the cty a selecton lst of ctes appears. Now contnue wth selectng a cty. Swtchng to a selecton lst s possble at any tme whle enterng a cty. Press the Lst soft key. The selecton lst appears. Now contnue wth selectng a cty. Selectng a cty Press or to select the destnaton cty. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. The selecton s cancelled f the Back soft key s pressed. Press. After selectng the desred cty, one of the followng menus appears: For larger ctes wth more than 15 streets: Enter street menu ( page 112). For smaller ctes wth up to 15 streets: Select street menu ( page 112). If no streets are regstered for the selected cty, or f a street extends through several cty centers: Select center menu ( page 111). The approprate menu can be dentfed from the dsplay n the status bar. 110

112 Narrowng of the destnaton after selectng a cty Press the CtyCtr soft key.. Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput Selectng a cty center. Besdes enterng a street name ( page 112), the followng soft keys are avalable for selectng a destnaton: Map soft key: Allows access to further destnaton nput drectly va road map ( page 115). CtyCtr soft key: For access to the selecton of a secton of the cty (center) ( page 111). POIs soft key: For access to the nput of a POI near the destnaton cty ( page 139). Enterng a cty center After the destnaton cty ( page 110) has been entered, the assocated cty center (secton of the cty) can be selected. Enter center s dsplayed n the status bar. Acceptng the destnaton dsplayed Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds. Enterng a center Use the keypad menu or the 12 buttton keypad to enter the data of the center ( page 107). After enterng the center a selecton lst of centers appears. Now contnue wth selectng a center. Swtchng to a selecton lst s possble at any tme whle enterng a center. Press the Lst soft key. The selecton lst appears. Now contnue wth selectng a center. Use or to select a cty center. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118) appears. Enterng a street n the destnaton cty The system accesses one of the followng menus after entry of a destnaton cty ( page 110): For larger ctes wth more than 15 streets: Enter street menu ( page 112). For smaller ctes wth up to 15 streets: Select street menu ( page 112). 111

113 Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput If no streets are regstered for the selected cty, or f a street extends through several cty centers: Select center menu ( page 111). The approprate menu can be dentfed from the dsplay n the status bar. Enterng a street Selectng a street Selectng the cty dstrct referrng to the street selected The system dstngushes between streets wth the same name n a cty by specfyng the dstrct. After selectng a street, a lst of cty dstrcts may appear. The status bar shows how many tmes the system found the same street name wthn a gven cty. Use the keypad menu or the 12 buttton keypad to enter the data of the street ( page 107). After enterng the street a selecton lst of streets appears. Now contnue wth selectng a street. Swtchng to a selecton lst s possble at any tme whle enterng a street. Press the Lst soft key. The selecton lst appears. Now contnue wth selectng a street. 112 Use or to select a street. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu wth the selected destnaton nformaton appears, or the Select Dstrct menu for selectng the cty dstrct referrng to the street selected appears. Use or to select a dstrct and press. The Start Route Gudance menu wth the selected destnaton nformaton appears.

114 Narrowng of the destnaton after selectng the street The followng soft keys are avalable to contnue destnaton selecton after enterng the street: Map soft key: Allows access to further destnaton nput drectly va road map ( page 115). Intrsct. soft key: An ntersecton wth the destnaton street can be accessed ( page 113). Hse.no. soft key: For nput of a house number of the destnaton street ( page 114). Only the entry of ether an ntersectng road or a house number s possble. Entry of both s not possble. POIs soft key: For enterng a POI near the destnaton street ( page 138). The followng soft keys can also be selected: Mode soft key: Allows access to the settng of the route mode ( page 105). Save soft key: The entered destnaton can be stored n the n the destnaton memory ( page 136). Enterng an ntersecton After enterng a street ( page 111), a street ntersectng wth ths street can be entered. Press the Intrsct. soft key. The Enter Intersecton menu or a lst of all ntersectng streets appears. The Intrsct. soft key s only avalable f streets ntersectng the destnaton street are stored as ntersectons on the navgaton DVD. Navgaton Front Cabn Enter Intersecton menu Destnaton nput Proceed the same as when enterng a street ( page 111). Lst of ntersectng streets Use or to select an ntersecton. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. 113

115 Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput Press. The Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118) appears. Enterng a house number A house number can be entered after enterng the destnaton street ( page 111). An ntersecton nstead of a house number can be entered ( page 113). Entry of both s not possble. Press the Hse. no. soft key. The Enter house number menu appears ( page 114), or the Select house number menu appears ( page 115). Enter house number menu Press,,, or to select the numbers. Press after each selecton. The cursor can also be moved dagonally usng and. or The Hse. no. soft key s only avalable when regstered house numbers are stored on the navgaton DVD for the selected street. Press - to enter the house number. Press the Delete soft key, f necessary. The number last accepted by the system s deleted. Do not confuse the Delete soft key (deleton of the last number) wth the Back soft key (deleton of the complete entry). Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds to confrm the nput, or Press or to select the ok symbol. The ok symbol can only be selected f the system recognzed the house number. Press. The house number lst appears. Now a house number range can be selected. 114

116 Selectng a house number range The soft key dsplays are now vsble. The soft key dsplay dsappears agan f a soft key s not selected wthn approx. 8 seconds. Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput Dsplay soft key You can select whch POIs wll appear as symbols on the map ( page 142). The soft keys Coord., Memory and Dsplay are vsble only f the map has been called up usng. Use or to select the desred range of house numbers. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118) appears. Enterng a destnaton usng the map Callng up the map dsplay Press, or press the Map soft key f t appears n a menu. The map appears n full-screen dsplay. If the soft key dsplays are hdden, press any soft key. Selectable soft keys Coord. soft key Allows enterng a destnaton va geo coordnates ( page 116). Symbol soft key Provdes access to settng the symbols dsplay ( page 131) Memory soft key: The current locaton s stored ( page 117). soft key: The map scale wll change to dsplay a more detaled map. soft key: The map scale wll change to dsplay a map that shows a larger area. Movng the map and selectng a destnaton Move the cursor pressng,,, or to select the desred destnaton. The cursor can also be moved dagonally usng and. Release the keys. 115

117 Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput If the system detects a street name at the locaton the cursor s pontng to, the correspondng street name s shown n the status bar. In ths example: MAIN ST The destnaton selecton wll be lost when pressng the Back soft key. The system swtches back to the detals of the prevously entered destnaton. Start route gudance to the selected destnaton Press. The Start Route Gudance menu appears f route gudance has not yet been actvated. Press. Route calculaton begns. If route gudance s already actve, you wll be prompted to confrm that you wsh to accept the new destnaton. Press to select Yes. Press. Route calculaton begns. Enterng a destnaton va geo coordnates Destnaton nput va coordnates (longtude and lattude) wll only be possble f the map dsplay s vsble and f the Coord. soft key s dsplayed. Press. Press any soft key f the soft key dsplays are hdden. The soft key dsplays appear. Press the Coord. soft key. The menu for enterng coordnates appears. You can set the ndvdual values for the longtude and lattude n ths menu. 1 Hours longtude value 2 Mnutes longtude value 3 Seconds longtude value 4 Seconds lattude value 5 Mnutes lattude value 6 Hours lattude value Press or to select the value you wsh to set. Select the desred value usng or. Keep repeatng the last two steps untl you have set the requred longtude and lattude. Press. 116

118 If the coordnates entered are located n the dgtal map range, the dsplay wll swtch to map dsplay wth cursor. The center pont of the cursor ndcates the poston of the coordnates entered on the map. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu appears. Press. Route calculaton begns. Route gudance s only possble to coordnates wthn the dgtal map range. Storng map locaton You can store the current vehcle poston or a locaton selected va the map as an entry n the Last Destnatons memory. Theren such entres are marked wth ( page 135). If you wsh to store such entres for later retreval or repeat usage, you can save them n the standard destnaton memory ( page 136). Storng current vehcle poston Press. Press any soft key f the soft key dsplays are hdden. The soft key dsplays appear. Navgaton Front Cabn Destnaton nput The system stores the current vehcle poston. Whle storage takes place, the Memory soft key dsplay changes ts color for a short perod of tme. Storng locatons selected va the map Press. Move the map and select a locaton. Press the Memory soft key. The system stores the current cursor poston. Whle storage takes place, the Memory soft key dsplay changes ts color for a short perod of tme. 1 Symbol = current vehcle locaton Press the Memory soft key. 117

119 Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance Route gudance Route gudance Startng route gudance Route gudance can be started f the destnaton nput s complete and Start Route Gudance s dsplayed at the bottom of the man area. Besdes startng route gudance the followng soft keys are avalable: Map soft key: Allows access to further destnaton nput drectly va road map ( page 115). POIs soft key: For enterng a POI near the destnaton street ( page 138). Mode soft key Provdes access to the route mode settng for certan road types to be avoded ( page 105). Save soft key Stores the entered destnaton n the destnaton memory ( page 136). To start route gudance, press. The route s calculated and route gudance begns. Route calculaton Dependng on the dstance to the destnaton, route calculaton can take some tme. Whle the route s beng calculated, Readng Nav DVD... Please Wat and an arrow pontng towards the destnaton are dsplayed. Once route calculaton s complete, route gudance begns. Because of changes n local traffc patterns (e.g. road works) and/or ncomplete data, errors n calculaton may occur. As a result, the recommended route may devate from the deal route. The data stored on the DVD only reflects local condtons at the tme of DVD producton. DVD maps may not cover all areas nor all routes wthn an area. Route re-calculaton The system wll calculate a new route durng actve route gudance f the drver fals to follow the route gudance. Durng recalculaton, NEW RTE s dsplayed. The arrow s not sold. Voce announcements G Warnng Voce announcements are ntended to drect you whle drvng wthout dvertng your attenton from the road and drvng. Always use ths feature nstead of consultng the map dsplay for drectons. Consultng the map dsplays for drectons may cause you to dvert your attenton from drvng and ncrease the rsk of an accdent. After route calculaton, the system asssts route gudance usng pctoral dsplays and voce announcements. 118

120 Current voce announcements If a voce announcement s not readly understood, t can be repeated at any tme. Press. The current voce announcement s repeated. Swtchng voce announcements ON/OFF Swtchng OFF Durng a voce announcement, press. For a short perod of tme, the message Voce announcements muted s dsplayed. Now further route gudance takes place usng only the symbols n the dsplay. If a new route gudance cycle s started, the announcements are automatcally swtched ON agan. Swtchng ON manually Press. Navgaton dsplays The navgaton dsplays are vsble only wth actvated route gudance. To swtch to the navgaton dsplay from another dsplay, e.g. from CD mode, press or. Two dsplay examples are shown below. Dsplay example 1 The road currently travelled on s ndcated n the status bar at the bottom, n ths example the I 280 W (Interstate 280W). The nformaton 0.9 m ndcates the dstance to the next drvng maneuver. Usng the control system, the dsplay unt can can be changed between km or mles (see your vehcle Operator's Manual). When the dsplay unt s set to mles, the COMAND wll ndcate dstances n mles (m) or feet (ft). When the dsplay unt s set to km, the COMAND wll ndcate dstances n klometers (km) and meters (m). Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance The crcle shows the current vehcle locaton. The arrow n the crcle desgnates the current drvng drecton. The remanng route s hghlghted n color. The colored hghlght only appears when the system has completed the route calculaton. Dsplay example 2 On the rght-hand sde of the dsplay the symbol for the next drvng maneuver s ndcated (here rght turn). On the very rght s a dstance bar. The blue part of the bar ndcates the dstance to the next drvng maneuver. In ths example the total length of the bar represents 800 ft. of road. 119

121 Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance If avalable, the street name followng the drvng maneuver s shown n the status bar at the top (here EXIT 5A LIVINGSTON). The destnaton s marked wth a flag on the map, any stopover destnaton s marked wth a flag s. Changng map scale The currently selected map scale s shown n the left-hand corner of the bottom status bar. Usng the control system, the dsplay unt can be changed between km or mles (see your vehcle Operator's Manual). When the dsplay unt s set to mles, the COMAND wll ndcate dstances n mles (m) or feet (ft). When the dsplay unt s set to km, the COMAND wll ndcate dstances n klometers (km) and meters (m). Press any soft key. The soft key dsplays appear. If a soft key s not selected wthn approx. 8 seconds, the soft key dsplay wll dsappear. Press the or soft key. Dependng on your selecton, the map zooms n and dsplays greater detal, or zooms out and shows a wder area. The map scale bar n the status bar wll show the map scale currently selected. Map orentaton Durng route gudance, a symbol wll appear on the left of the bottom status bar f map dsplay s swtched ON. North symbol : Fxed map orentaton, north s always pontng up, or Compass symbol : Dynamc map orentaton, drvng drecton s always pontng up. Map orentaton can be selected ( page 132). Changng map dsplay The map dsplay can be swtched between splt-screen mode and full-screen mode manually or automatcally. Splt-screen mode The map s shown on the left, whle nformaton concernng the next drvng maneuver s shown on the rght. Full-screen mode The map covers the entre screen. 120

122 Swtchng manually Press. Each tme s pressed the system swtches between splt-screen and fullscreen dsplay mode. Swtchng automatcally See "Automatc map togglng" ( page 133).. Dependng on the map dsplay settng ( page 132), n the full-screen mode the status bar wll be dsplay: the estmated tme of arrval/remanng dstance to the destnaton or stopover destnaton the poston dsplay Destnaton reached Route gudance ends when the selected destnaton s reached. Cancellng route gudance In navgaton mode, press. A prompt as to whether or not route gudance s to be cancelled appears. Press to select menu tem Yes. Press. Route gudance s cancelled. The Navgaton man menu appears after a bref delay. Route gudance can be contnued agan n the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance Partally dgtzed areas The dgtal map may contan areas that are only partally dgtzed although they are wthn a dgtzed regon. G Warnng Due to ncomplete dgtzaton, the route shown on the map may dffer from the actual road/traffc stuaton. If you follow the route shown on the map, for example, t s possble that you could drve the wrong way down a one-way street or that a street cannot be drven on. When usng route gudance n a partally dgtzed area, you must therefore be sure to observe all relevant traffc regulatons and the course of the road. G Warnng All relevant traffc regulatons and the course of the road always take prorty over the route shown on the map. 121

123 Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance If the destnaton s wthn a partally dgtzed area COMAND gudes you through fully dgtzed areas for as long as possble. Route gudance s conducted n the usual manner,.e. wth voce announcements and route gudance dsplays. Before the vehcle reaches a partally dgtzed area, Maybach notfes you of ths wth the followng announcements: Be prepared to enter an area where turn by turn gudance cannot be provded. In 700 feet you wll enter an area where turn by turn gudance cannot be provded. The ndcated dstance can be seen here by way of example. In realty, t may be dfferent. You are about to enter an area where turn by turn gudance cannot be provded. When you call up the nfo menu to ths type of destnaton ( page 125), the followng data shown there may dffer from the actual stuaton: Estmated tme of arrval Remanng drvng tme to the destnaton Remanng dstance to the destnaton Route gudance wthn a partally dgtzed area If you start route gudance n ths type of area, you wll hear the followng announcement: You are currently n an area where turn by turn gudance cannot be provded. Route gudance s provded by means of a drecton arrow showng the compass headng to the destnaton. COMAND wll not generate automatc voce announcements. If you try to call up or repeat an announcement manually ( page 118), you wll hear the announcement You are currently n an area where turn by turn gudance cannot be provded.. Durng route gudance, the dsplay s dvded. On the rght-hand sde you wll see the drecton arrow showng the compass headng to the destnaton. On the left-hand sde of the dsplay you wll see the map wth the suggested route. The suggested route s hghlghted blue. However, t may not be possble to follow the suggested route because, for example, the road s closed or not open for car traffc. If, durng route gudance, COMAND leads you back nto a fully dgtzed area, route gudance wll smply contnue n the usual manner. 122

124 Off-road and off-map Route gudance to an off-road destnaton G Warnng The COMAND navgaton system may drect you to off-road routes that your vehcle may not be capable of traversng through wthout damagng your tres, wheels or vehcle. It s the drver s sole responsblty to determne the sutablty of the route. Off-road routes may be of varyng condtons and ther approprateness for use may be affected by varous factors such as tme of day, tme of year and mmedate weather condtons that cannot be judged or taken nto consderaton by the COMAND system. COMAND can gude you to destnatons wthn the area covered by the dgtal map, even f a destnaton s not located at a road known to the system. These destnatons are shown as off-road destnatons, whch you can enter usng the map, for example. In these cases, COMAND gudes you for as long as possble wth voce announcements and dsplays on roads known to the system. Shortly before you reach the last known pont n the dgtzed road network, you wll hear the announcement The destnaton s nearby. Follow the arrow on the dsplay. You wll then see an arrow that ndcates the drecton to the off-road destnaton. When the off-road destnaton s close to the road, Area of dest. reached appears n addton below the arrow. When you leave the last known pont n the dgtzed road network, drecton arrows showng the compass headng to the destnaton gude you. You wll also see the Drecton to destnaton dsplay. Route gudance from an off-road locaton to a destnaton If there s no road avalable on map at current poston of the car, vehcle s off road. COMAND s also able to gude you to a destnaton from such a locaton. At the start of the route gudance, you wll see the Off Road message and a drecton arrow. The drecton arrow shows the compass headng to the actual destnaton. The route s hghlghted blue from the nearest road known to the system. Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance As soon as the vehcle s back on a road known to the system, route gudance contnues n the usual way. Route gudance from an off-map locaton to a destnaton If the vehcle poston s outsde the area covered by the dgtal map, then the vehcle s n an off-map locaton. COMAND s also able to gude you to a destnaton from such a locaton. At the start of the route gudance, you wll see the Off Map message and a drecton arrow. The drecton arrow shows the compass headng to the actual destnaton. The route s hghlghted blue from the nearest road known to the system. As soon as the vehcle s back on a road known to the system, route gudance contnues n the usual way. 123

125 Navgaton Front Cabn Route gudance Off-road durng route gudance The road layout may dffer from the data on the dgtal map, due to road constructon measures, for example. In such cases, the system cannot allocate the vehcle s poston to the dgtal map and the vehcle s therefore n an off-road poston. The Off Road message and an arrow showng the compass headng to the destnaton appear on the dsplay. As soon as the system can allocate the vehcle poston s to the map agan, route gudance contnues n the usual way. 124

126 Durng route gudance Durng route gudance Usng the soft keys, other menus or dsplays can be selected and settngs can be adjusted durng route gudance. Showng soft key dsplays COMAND automatcally hdes the soft key dsplays after a certan perod of tme. Press any soft key whle route gudance s actve: The soft key dsplays appear. Selectable soft keys: Info soft key: Allows access to the Info menu ( page 125). Detour soft key: Allows access to the Detour functon ( page 127). St-over soft-key: Allows access to the stopover functon ( page 128). Symbol soft-key: Allows access to settng the symbols dsplay ( page 131). Memory soft key: Storng the current locaton ( page 117). Dsplay soft key: Allows access to the Dsplay menu ( page 130). soft key: The map scale wll change to dsplay a more detaled map. soft key: The map scale wll change to dsplay a map that shows a larger area. Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Info menu If the soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125), press the Info soft key. The Info menu s dsplayed. Ths shows you the man destnaton and a stopover destnaton that may have been entered s. 1 Estmated tme of arrval 2 Estmated drvng tme n hours and mnutes 3 Estmated journey (dstance) 125

127 Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Ponts 1, 2 and 3 refer to the stopover destnaton. You'll only see the detals for the fnal destnaton when you arrve at your stopover and the system has calculated the route to the man destnaton. The estmated tme of arrval does not refer to the tme zone of destnaton, but always refers to the tme zone of the vehcle's current locaton. For a correct calculaton, make sure that the system clock s set correctly. Selectable soft keys: Route soft key: Allows access to the dsplay of the route on the map ( page 126). Mode soft key: Allows access to the settng of the route mode ( page 105). Dsplayng the route on the map In the Info menu ( page 125), press the Route soft key. The map appears. The remanng route secton s hghlghted n blue color. The destnaton s marked wth a flag, any stopover destnaton s marked wth a flag s. The current vehcle locaton s dentfed by symbol. Dependng on the dstance to the destnaton, t may take some tme before the route dsplay appears. Dsplayng the route lst In the Info menu ( page 125), press the Route soft key. The route appears on the map. Press the Lst soft key. The lst of remanng road/route sectons appears. The road currently travelled on appears at the top. Press or to scroll through the lst. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. 126

128 Dependng on the dstance to the destnaton, t may take a few moments before the route lst s completed. The lst s completed only f route calculaton s completed. Dest. s dsplayed before the last lst entry. Detour functon The Detour functon blocks a route segment ahead. The length of ths route segment can be entered. The system then calculates a detour route, f possble. Show the soft key dsplays ( page 125). The Detour soft key dsplay ndcates whether the Detour functon s actve. = not actve = actve Detour functon s not actve: You can actvate the functon and set the length of a route segment to be blocked ( page 127). Detour functon s already actve: You can change the length of the route segment to be blocked ( page 127), or swtch off the Detour functon by deletng the detour ( page 128). Actvatng functon and settng length of route segment to be blocked The soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125). Press the Detour soft key. The system gves you a full-screen map and freezes the map and screen showng the poston of the vehcle. You can now set the dstance of the route segment to be blocked. Contnue to press the soft key More or Less untl the desred dstance of the route segment to be blocked s reached. The dstance of the route segment blocked ahead appears n the status bar. The secton of the road that s blocked appears as a red and whte dotted lne on the map. Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Press. The system calculates a new route avodng the blocked road segment. Changng detour The soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125). Press the Detour soft key. Press to select the Change detour menu tem. Press. You can now enter a new route segment to be blocked. Contnue to press the soft key More or Less untl the desred dstance of the route segment to be blocked s set. The dstance of the route segment blocked ahead appears n the status bar. The secton of the road that s blocked appears as a red and whte dotted lne on the map. Press. The system calculates a new route avodng the blocked road segment. 127

129 Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Deletng detour The soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125). The Detour soft key appears n a dfferent color f a Detour s already actve. Press the Detour soft key. Stopover Ths functon offers the opton of selectng a stopover destnaton whle route gudance s actve. A stopover destnaton can be, for example, a gas staton, a rest area, or a hosptal, etc. Once the stopover destnaton has been reached, the system automatcally calculates the route to the fnal destnaton. Route gudance to a stop-over destnaton s already actve: You can change the stop-over destnaton or cancel the route gudance to t by deletng the stop-over ( page 129). Enterng a stopover destnaton The soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125). Press the St-over soft key. The full-screen map dsplay appears. Press to select the Delete detour menu tem. Press. The blocked road segment or detour requrement s cancelled. The system recalculates the route. The St-over soft key dsplay ndcates whether the stop-over functon s actve. = not actve = actve Route gudance to a stop-over destnaton s not actve: You can enter a stop-over destnaton ( page 128). Selectable soft keys: soft key: A lst of Maybach Studos n the area appears on the dsplay. soft key: A lst of gas statons n the area appears on the dsplay. 128

130 soft key: A lst of parkng areas and mult-story car parks n the area appears on the dsplay. soft key: A lst of restaurants n the area appears on the dsplay. soft key: A lst of hosptals n the area appears on the dsplay. Other soft key: The Destnaton entry menu appears when pressng ths soft key. Any destnaton cty can now be entered. Please see "Enterng a cty" for the remanng steps ( page 110). Press one of the soft keys, for example the soft key. One of several food categores can be chosen (f avalable). Press or to select a category from the lst. The Page soft key allows scrollng through the lst page by page. Press. If approprate destnatons are avalable, a lst of restaurants n the area appears on the dsplay. Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance The arrows pont n the drecton of the destnaton. Dstance nformaton specfes the drect dstance to the destnaton. Press or to select a destnaton from the lst. The Page soft key allows scrollng through the lst page by page. Press the Detals soft key, f you want to see detals of the selected destnaton. The Detals dsappear agan after approx. 3 seconds, or when pressng the Detals soft key agan. Press after the selecton of a destnaton. The system begns to calculate the route to the selected stopover destnaton. Changng/deletng stopover destnatons The soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125). 129

131 Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance. A stopover destnaton can be changed or deleted only whle the route gudance to ths stopover s actve (ndcated by ). If no route gudance to a stop-over destnaton s actve yet ( page 128). Defnng route gudance dsplays The soft key dsplays are shown ( page 125). Press the Dsplay soft key. The Dsplay menu appears. Press the St-over soft key. The menu for deletng or changng the stopover destnaton appears. Press to select the Delete actve stopover entry. Press. Ths wll delete the stopover. The system calculates the route to the fnal destnaton, or Press to select the Replace actve stopover entry. Press. The stopover s deleted, a new stopover destnaton can be entered ( page 128). Selectable soft keys: Symbols soft key: Allows access to settng the symbols dsplay ( page 131). Vew soft key: Allows access to settng the map orentaton ( page 132). MAP soft key: Allows access to the Map Dsplay menu ( page 132). 130

132 Auto soft key: Allows access to the Automatc map swtchng menu ( page 133). Zoom soft key: Allows access to the defnton of the scales for full-screen and splt-screen map dsplay ( page 134). Settng symbol dsplays It can be selected whch POIs are to appear as symbols on the map. The symbols are on dsplay only f the map scale s set at 0.05 m (50 m), 0.1 m (100 m), 0.2 m (200 m), or 0.5 m (500 m). To set the map scale ( page 120). In the Dsplay menu ( page 130), press the Symbols soft key. The avalable optons appear. Press or to select an opton. Press. The selected opton s actvated. A sold crcle desgnates an actvated opton. Standard opton: The symbols for the system default settng are dsplayed on the map. Personal opton: The symbols to be dsplayed can be selected and set ( page 131). None opton: No symbols wll be dsplayed on the map. Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance The Change soft key s only avalable f the Personal opton s selected. Otherwse, t wll appear shaded out. Settng personal symbol dsplay After actvatng the Personal opton, press the Change soft key. The lst of avalable symbols appears. Empty square = symbol deactvated Sold square = symbol actvated Any number of symbols can be actvated. Press or to select a lst entry. Press. Actvate or deactvate the symbol dependng on ts prevous state. Several symbols can be actvated. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. The settng s stored. 131

133 Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Settng map orentaton One of the followng orentatons can be selected: 2D North up Fxed map orentaton, north s always pontng up, 2D Headng up Dynamc map orentaton, drvng drecton s always pontng up. In the Dsplay menu ( page 130), press the Vew soft key. Both optons appear on the dsplay. Empty crcle = deactvated Sold crcle = actvated Changng map orentaton Press or to select the deactvated opton. Press. The orentaton changes. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. Durng route gudance, a symbol wll appear on the left-hand sde of the bottom status bar f map dsplay s swtched ON. North symbol : Fxed map orentaton, north s always pontng up, Compass symbol : Dynamc map orentaton, drvng drecton s always pontng up. Map dsplay menu You can set the followng to be dsplayed n the status bar: Tme of arrval/dst. to Dest. If the full-screen map dsplay s actvated ( page 120), the estmated tme of arrval and the remanng dstance to the destnaton wll be dsplayed. If you have entered a stopover destnaton ( page 128), the correspondng data wll be dsplayed. Current-Locaton Dsplay If the full-screen map dsplay s actvated ( page 120), the followng data wll be dsplayed: The current poston as coordnates. The number of satelltes that can currently be receved. The current elevaton (ALT = alttude) above sea level. The COMAND uses GPS to calculate the elevaton above sea level. For reasons of tolerance, ths value may devate from the actual value. No dsplay The name of the current road s dsplayed. In the Dsplay menu ( page 130), press the MAP soft key. The possble optons appear. 132

134 The sold crcle shows the current settng. Press or to select the desred opton. Press. The map dsplay s swtched. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. Automatc map togglng If you have set the map vew to full screen ( page 120) and the automatc map togglng functon s actvated, the followng happens: The system automatcally swtches to the splt-screen map dsplay when a drvng maneuver s announced. As soon as the drvng maneuver s completed the system automatcally returns to full-screen map dsplay. Swtchng automatc togglng ON/OFF In the Dsplay menu, press the Auto soft key ( page 130). Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Optons On and Off appear. The sold crcle shows the current settng. Press or to select the desred opton. Press. Dependng on the prevous settng, automatc map togglng s swtched ON or OFF. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. 133

135 Navgaton Front Cabn Durng route gudance Scales for full-screen and splt-screen map dsplay Selecton of full-screen or splt-screen map scales to be set together (default settng) or ndvdually: In the Dsplay menu, press the Zoom soft key ( page 130). The Standard settng and Manual optons appear. The sold crcle shows the current settng. Standard settng opton: The scales for full-screen and spltscreen map dsplay are always dentcal. Changng the scale ( page 120) on one map changes the scale of the other map. Manual opton: The map scales can be set dfferently. Changng the scale on one map has no effect on the current scale of the other map. Press or to select the desred opton. Press. Dependng on the prevous settng, the Standard settng (dentcal scale) or Manual (ndvdual scale) opton s actvated. Fnally, press the Back soft key or wat for the screen to change. 134

136 Navgaton Front Cabn Last destnaton and destnaton memory Last destnatons and destnaton memory Last destnaton and destnaton memory Last destnatons memory Press. The Last destnatons memory automatcally The lst of last destnatons s dsplayed. stores the last destnaton for whch route The most recently stored destnaton s at gudance had been started. the top. The current vehcle poston and postons selected va the map can also be stored as a destnaton n ths memory ( page 117). Such destnatons are marked wth the symbol. When you store such destnatons permamently n the standard destnaton memory ( page 136), the symbol wll dsappear. Altogether amaxmum of 50 destnatons can be stored. Callng up the Last destnatons memory and selectng a destnaton Call up the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). Press to select the Last destnatons menu tem. Use or to select a destnaton. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. Selectable soft keys and optons Save soft key Stores the selected destnaton n the standard destnaton memory ( page 136). Detals soft key Dsplays detals on the selected destnaton (f avalable). Delete soft key Allows to delete the selected destnaton ( page 136). Startng route gudance to a selected last destnaton Select a destnaton ( page 136) Press. The full destnaton appears on the dsplay. 135

137 Navgaton Front Cabn Last destnaton and destnaton memory Press to accept ths destnaton, otherwse press the Back soft key. The Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118) appears. Deletng a destnaton from the last destnatons memory Select a destnaton ( page 109). Press the Delete soft key. A prompt appears to confrm whether or not the destnaton s to be deleted. Press to select menu tem Yes. Press. The destnaton s deleted. Destnaton memory Callng up the destnaton memory and selectng a destnaton Call up the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). Press or to select the Destnaton memory menu tem. Press. The destnaton memory appears. Ths s ndcated by Destnaton memory n the status bar. Press,,, or to select the desred entry. Selectable soft keys and optons Start route gudance to the selected destnaton ( page 109). Delete the selected destnaton ( page 136). Dsplay the detals of the selected destnaton (f avalable): Press the Detals soft key for ths purpose. Startng route gudance to a destnaton stored n the destnaton memory Select a destnaton. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118) appears. Press f you want to start route gudance, otherwse press the Back soft key. Deletng a destnaton from the destnaton memory Select a destnaton. Press the Delete soft key: A delete entry prompt appears. Press to select the menu tem Yes. Press. 136

138 Navgaton Front Cabn The system deletes the entry from the destnaton memory. Storng a destnaton In the Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118), press the Save soft key; or Select a destnaton from the Last destnatons memory ( page 135) and press the Save soft key. The system automatcally shows a default name (the cty f applcable) as Destnaton name; however a dfferent name can be entered. Press the Delete soft key to delete the default name. Upper and lower case characters, accented characters, specal characters and numbers can be entered. To select lower or upper case or to select specal characters, the followng shft symbols on the dsplay are avalable: ABC = upper case abc = lower case... = specal characters Symbol represents a space. Last destnaton and destnaton memory Do not confuse the Delete soft key (deleton of the last character) wth the Back soft key (deleton of the complete entry). Storng under the default name Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds; or Use or to select the ok symbol and press. The system wll store the address under the default name. Storng under a dfferent name The name must have at least one character. If necessary, use, or to select one of the shft felds. Press. The characters are shfted. Use,,,, or to select the characters. Press after each selecton. If necessary, press the Delete soft key to delete the character last entered. Upon completon of the name entry press and hold for approx. 2 seconds; or Use or to select the ok symbol and press. The system wll store the address. 137

139 Navgaton Front Cabn POI (Ponts of Interest) POI (Ponts of Interest) Enterng POIs POIs nclude gas statons, arports, parkng areas, rest stops, or hosptals, etc. POIs (Ponts of Interest) Va Navgaton man menu Call up the Navgaton man menu ( page 104). The Navgaton man menu appears. Press. The POIs man menu appears ( page 138). Va the map A POI shown on the map can be selected ( page 142). Va Destnaton entry menu Open the Destnaton entry menu ( page 109). Enter the desred detals of a destnaton ( page 109). Press the POIs soft key. Proceed as descrbed n the "Selectng POI n the local area of the current locaton" secton under the "Selectng a POI category" ( page 139). POIs man menu Press to select the POIs menu tem. A POI n the vcnty of a cty can now be selected, or f a further locaton detal s to be entered, e.g. a street: A POI n the vcnty of ths detaled locaton can be selected: Selecton of one of the followng menu tems s possble: Current poston: Selectng a POI n the local area ( page 139). Select cty Selectng a POI n any cty ( page 140). 138

140 Global destnatons: A POI from global categores can be selected ( page 140). The selecton s restrcted to the country entered last; however, the country selecton can be changed. Selectng POI n the local area of the current locaton In the POIs man menu, ( page 138) select the Current Poston menu tem. Press. A lst of POI categores appears for the selecton of a category. Selectng a POI category Press or to select a category. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. Press. If you have selected the Restaurant category, another lst wll be dsplayed from whch you can select a sub-category, e.g. Chnese food. If you have selected a dfferent category, ths wll take you straght to the lst of Specal destnatons. Navgaton Front Cabn Selectng a POI POI (Ponts of Interest) Press or to select a POI. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. Press the Detals soft key, f requred: Detals of the destnaton appear. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu ( page 118) appears. 139

141 I Navgaton Front Cabn POI (Ponts of Interest) Selectng POI for a selected cty In the POIs man menu, ( page 138), select the Select cty menu tem. Enter a cty as descrbed n the Destnaton entry ( page 109) secton.. Selectng POI for a long-dstance destnaton In the POIs man menu, ( page 138) select the Global destnatons menu tem. The lst of long-dstance POI categores appears. Selectng a POI category Press or to select a category. Press. Dependng on the number of POIs n the category, entry of a POI name ( page 141) or the selecton of a POI ( page 141) can now be made. Selectng another regon Press the Regon soft key. The regon lst appears. Please see "Selectng the regon" ( page 109). After enterng the cty, press. Upon enterng the cty, proceed as descrbed n "Selectng a POI n the local area of the current locaton" ( page 139). The followng optons are now avalable: Select a POI category. Select another regon. 140

142 Enterng POI names I Selectng a POI Navgaton Front Cabn POI (Ponts of Interest) The detals dsappear after approx. 3 seconds, or when pressng the Detals soft key agan. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu appears ( page 118). Proceed as descrbed for enterng a cty name ( page 110). The entry can be bypassed f the POI name s not recognzed. Press and hold for more than approx. 2 seconds. Upon entry of a POI name, or after bypassng the entry, a POI can be selected. Press or to select a POI. The Page soft keys allow scrollng through the lst page by page. The lst also ncludes the dstance "as the crow fles" (as opposed to road dstance), and the drecton to the POI. Press the Detals soft key, f you want to see detals of a selected POI. Press to start route gudance. The Start Route Gudance menu appears ( page 118). 141

143 Navgaton Front Cabn POI (Ponts of Interest) Selectng a POI usng the map Press, or n the Destnaton entry menu press the Map soft key ( page 109). The full-screen map appears on the dsplay. Symbols ndcate the POIs. The symbols to be dsplayed can be selected ( page 131). Symbols are ndcated only f the map scale s set to 0.05 m (50 m), 0.1 m (100 m), 0.2 m (200 m), or 0.5 m (500 m). For map scale settng ( page 120). If requred, press,,,,, or to move the map. Press any soft key f the soft key dsplays are hdden. The soft key dsplays appear.. Press the Symbol soft key. A POI s selected and hghlghted n color. Its name appears n the status bar. Press the Prev. or Next soft key to select the desred POI. Press the Detals soft key, f requred. Detals of the selected POI appear. Press. A prompt appears to confrm the selected POI as the destnaton. Press to select menu tem Yes. Press. The Start Route Gudance menu appears ( page 118). 142

144 Software update Software update The system can be updated wth a new Navgaton DVD. The new DVD selectvely ncorporates updated maps as well as new devce software. Updatng can take several mnutes. Durng updatng, the operaton of CO- MAND s restrcted. Swtchng OFF s not permtted. After updatng, the vehcle should be parked outsde wth swtched-on gnton for approx. 10 mnutes. Start update Swtch COMAND ON ( page 34). On the navgaton computer, press key. 1 DVD ejecton 2 DVD slot The navgaton computer s located on the left sde n the vehcle s trunk. The computer ejects a DVD already nserted. Remove the DVD from slot 2. Insert the new DVD nto slot 2 wth the label facng up. The DVD s pulled-n by the computer. COMAND ssues a prompt for confrmaton of the update. Press to select tem Yes. Press. After a bref delay, the system s swtched OFF, and then automatcally swtched ON agan. Intally, the dsplay shows the operaton mode selected pror to the update. Shortly thereafter a progress dsplay appears. After a certan perod of tme the progress dsplay reaches 100%, the system s swtched OFF, and then automatcally swtched ON agan. If after swtchng ON the dsplay brefly shows Please wat: Navgaton Front Cabn Software update The update s completed. The navgaton system s ready for use. If after swtchng ON the dsplay Please wat remans for a longer perod of tme: The system also updates the GPS software, whch takes approx. 6 mnutes. Durng ths perod of tme, the navgaton system cannot be operated. Wat untl the dsplay goes off-screen. The update s completed. The navgaton system s ready for use. 143

145 144

146 Voce Control Front Cabn Important notes Controls Telephone Rado CD player MP3 player Command lst Practcal hnts What to do Vsual help Indvdualzaton

147 Voce Control Front Cabn Important notes Important notes Important notes G Warnng Please devote your attenton frst and foremost to the traffc stuaton you are n. Whle the system permts hands-free phone operaton, attenton to traffc may be dverted not only by physcal operaton of a phone, but also by the dstracton of a phone conversaton whle drvng. As such, for safety reasons, we encourage the drver to stop the vehcle n a safe place before answerng or placng a phone call. For safety reasons, you should only select a destnaton when the vehcle s statonary. Whle the navgaton system provdes drectonal assstance, the drver must reman focused on safe drvng behavor, especally attenton to traffc and street sgns, and should utlze the system s audo cues whle drvng. The navgaton system does not supply any nformaton on stop sgns, yeld sgns, traffc regulatons or traffc safety rules. Ther observance always remans n the drver s personal responsblty. DVD maps do not cover all areas nor all routes wthn an area. Traffc regulatons always have prorty over any route recommendatons gven. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph (approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 13.5 m) every second. G Warnng Navgaton announcements are ntended to drect you whle drvng wthout dvertng your attenton from the road and drvng. Please always use ths feature nstead of consultng the map dsplay for drectons. Consultng the symbols or map dsplay for drectons may cause you to dvert your attenton from drvng and ncrease your rsk of an accdent. G Warnng Please do not use the Voce Control System n an emergency, as the tone of your voce may change n a stressful stuaton. Ths could cause a delay n completng your phone call n a tmely manner. Ths could dstract you n an emergency stuaton and cause you to be nvolved n an accdent. Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. 146

148 Functonal overvew The Voce Control System gves you the capablty to control the followng systems on your vehcle usng spoken commands: Telephone Audo (rado, CD player (Audo-CD, MP3- CD)) You control these systems usng spoken commands. Moreover, controls such as the operatng lever and buttons on the multfuncton steerng wheel ( page 148) allow you to keep your hands on the steerng wheel. The command vocabulary conssts of approxmately 200 ready to use phrases. The Voce Control System recognzes commands and number sequences, rrespectve of the speaker. To optmze speech recognton for your voce follow the ndvdualzaton process ( page 173). The commands and dgt sequences can be spoken wthout pausng between the ndvdual words. If an unavalable or ncorrect command s used, the Voce Control System wll prompt you for a new command by askng Please repeat or announcng No such devce. In order to provde for a safe and comfortable dalog, the Voce Control System acknowledges mportant commands. Command types The Voce Control commands can be categorzed as: Global Commands These are commands always avalable to you as soon as the Voce Control System s actvated (for example Help commands). Local Commands These are commands avalable only for the currently actve system (for example commands to control the CD player). For a complete lst of commands ( page 164). Voce Control Front Cabn Important notes Durng Voce Control System operaton vsual help wndows also appear n the COMAND dsplay ( page 149). Actve system The local commands always refer to the currently actve system shown n the dsplay. If, for example, you lsten to the rado whle the telephone system s actve on the dsplay, you have to swtch to the rado usng the command Rado before you can operate the rado. Wth the command "Map" you can swtch to the Navgaton map on the COMAND dsplay at any tme. 147

149 Voce Control Front Cabn Controls Controls Actvaton/deactvaton of Voce Control System Controls 1 Actvate Voce Control System - Brefly pull operatng lever to poston! 2 Deactvate Voce Control System - Brefly push operatng lever to poston 0 3 Increase volume - Press button æ ( page 149) 4 Decrease volume - Press button ç ( page 149) 5 Receve ncomng telephone call - Press button s 6 End telephone call - Press button t Voce Control can be deactvated at any tme, even durng a dalog. Please note that f the Voce Control System s deactvated durng a dalog, then the complete procedure s stopped. Actvatng Voce Control Turn the SmartKey n the steerng lock to starter swtch poston 1 or 2. See your vehcle s Operator s Manual for nformaton on starter swtch postons. Swtch the rado on. See your COMAND manual for nformaton on how to swtch the rado on. Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. An audble tone (beep) confrms the actvaton of the system. Speak a command. Deactvatng Voce Control Brefly push the operatng lever to poston 0. or Speak the command Cancel (ths command s not possble when makng voce entres). 148

150 Settng volume level Actvate Voce Control System. Speak a command, for example Help. Press button æ or ç. The volume s ncreased or decreased durng voce output. or Set volume for voce output usng the volume control button on the rado. See your COMAND manual for nformaton on how to set the volume on the rado. Dsplay In addton to the acoustc help functon, a vsual help functon (VC tps) s avalable on the COMAND 1 dsplay ( page 172). Upon actvatng the Voce Control System, the most mportant avalable commands for the currently actve system appear on the dsplay. These commands also appear on the dsplay by brefly pushng the operatng lever to poston 0. Voce Control Front Cabn 1 COMAND dsplay Controls 149

151 Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone Telephone G Warnng! Telephone operaton Some jursdctons prohbt the drver from usng a cellular telephone whle drvng. Whether or not prohbted by law, for safety reasons, the drver should not use the cellular telephone whle the vehcle s n moton. Stop the vehcle n a safe locaton before placng or answerng a call. If you nonetheless choose to use the cellular phone whle drvng, please use the handsfree feature and be sure to pay attenton to the traffc stuaton at all tmes. Use the cellular phone only when road, weather and traffc condtons permt. Bear n mnd that at a speed of just 30 mph approxmately 50 km/h), your vehcle s coverng a dstance of 44 feet (approxmately 14 m) every second. G Warnng! Never operate rado transmtters equpped wth a bult-n or attached antenna (.e. wthout beng connected to an external antenna) from nsde the vehcle whle the engne s runnng. Dong so could lead to a malfuncton of the vehcle s electronc system, possbly resultng n an accdent and/or personal njury. Telephone operaton The Voce Control System gves you the followng capabltes: Enter a telephone unlock code Dal a phone number by speakng the telephone number Create a personal phone book wth up to 80 entres ( page 154) Dal a phone number by speakng the name of a phone book entry ( page 154) Import entres from your cellular phone ( page 156) Delete a phone book entry from the phone book Have the system read out the phone book entry by entry Redal names and numbers Manage and access the automated answerng system/voce mal box Voce Control recognzes whether your telephone s swtched on the correspondng moble network s logged n t s possble to dal If dalng s not possble, the Voce Control System wll advse you accordngly. You can contnue operatng your cellular phone usng the keypad on your phone. Before you can operate the telephone usng the Voce Control System, you have to actvate the Voce Control System ( page 148). Telephone commands For a complete lst of commands ( page 165). Telephone Use the command Telephone to actvate the telephone system. Use ths command f you want the dgts you are enterng to appear on the man dsplay. Help Telephone Use the command Help Telephone and the Voce Control System wll read out an opton lst of avalable functons and commands that can be used n conjuncton wth the telephone ( page 169). 150

152 Enter unlock code Use the command Enter unlock code to nput the code to unlock your telephone. After speakng the command, you are prompted to enter the code. Speak the code as a contnuously spoken strng of dgts or n dgt blocks of three to fve dgts. Dgts from Zero to Nne may be used. After each dgt block (separate the dgt blocks by usng an approx. 0.5 second pause), the Voce Control System repeats the recognzed dgts and wats untl you contnue speakng. Sample dalog: s t s t s Enter unlock code Enter unlock code Zero zero one one Zero zero one one Save GSM phones only: If the ncorrect unlock code s entered three consecutve tmes, the phone card s blocked. You can unblock the phone card usng the PUK (Personal Unblockng Key) to unblock the card. The PUK can only be entered usng the keypad on your telephone (see separate operatng nstructons for your cellular telephone). Dal number You can dal a phone number usng the command Dal number. Dgts from Zero to Nne may be used. The phone number must be spoken as a contnuously spoken strng of dgts or n dgt blocks (three to fve dgts n each block). After each dgt block (separate the dgt blocks by usng an approx. 0.5 second pause), the Voce Control System repeats the recognzed dgts and wats untl you contnue speakng. When dalng numbers, you may pronounce the frst four dgts as One eght hundred and the system wll recognze Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone the spoken entres as One eght zero zero. All other numerc entres must be spoken as ndvdual numbers. Sample dalog: s t s t s t s t Dal number The number, please Zero one three zero Zero one three zero Fve zero zero fve Fve zero zero fve Dal Callng You can also dal the telephone number spoken by dong the followng (nstead of usng the command Dal ): Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston! or Press button s on the multfuncton steerng wheel. Keep n mnd that the system starts dalng before all numbers are rected n full. 151

153 Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone Confrm Usng the command Confrm wll repeat all dgts spoken up to that pont. Upon repeatng the dgts, the system wll prompt you to contnue your nput. Sample dalog: s t s t s t s t s t Dal number The number, please Zero one three zero Zero one three zero Confrm Zero one three zero, go ahead Fve zero zero fve Fve zero zero fve Dal Callng Correct Usng the command Correct wll correct the last entered dgt block. After speakng the command, the last dgt block s deleted and all prevously entered dgts are repeated. The system then prompts you to contnue your nput. Sample dalog: s t s t s t s t s t s t Dal number The number, please Zero one three zero Zero one three zero Fve zero zero fve Fve zero nne fve Correct Zero one three zero, go ahead Fve zero zero fve Fve zero zero fve Dal Callng Delete Usng the command Delete wll erase all dgts entered. The system then prompts you to start your nput agan. Sample dalog: s t s t s t s t s t s t s t Dal number The number, please Zero one three zero Zero one three zero Fve zero zero fve Fve zero zero fve Delete The number s removed, go ahead Four two seven three Four two seven three Three nne one Three nne one Dal Callng 152

154 Redal Use the command Redal to dal the last daled number. Managng an automated answerng system/voce mal box Actvate the Voce Control System to access and manage your answerng machne/voce mal box. Actvate the Voce Control System durng a phone call ( page 148). An audble tone (beep) confrms the actvaton of the system. Speak the requred dgts ( Zero to Nne ). or Speak the requred words Star and Pound. Speak the fnal command Dal. The system dals the number entered. You can also dal the telephone number spoken by dong the followng (nstead of usng the command Dal ): Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston! or Press button s on the multfuncton steerng wheel. Keep n mnd that the system starts dalng before all numbers are rected n full. Phone book operaton G Warnng! Please devote your attenton frst and foremost to the traffc stuaton you are n. Before your journey, please famlarze yourself wth the phone book functons. Only use the Voce Control System when road and traffc condtons permt you to do so. Otherwse you could be nvolved n an accdent n whch you or others could be njured. Voce Control Front Cabn The Voce Control phone book: Telephone gves you the capablty to save phone numbers and assocate a name wth a phone number n the phone book contans all entres of the nternal memory of the moble phone (TDMA, CDMA and GSM moble phone), entres are marked wth symbols of the SIM card (GSM moble phone) You can save up to 80 speaker-dependent voce entres n the Voce Control phone book. Usng these entres, you can dal a phone number saved n the phone book. 153

155 Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone Phone book commands Save name Use the command Save name to create a new entry n your phone book. After usng the command, the system wll prompt you to enter a phone number. Dgts from Zero to Nne can be entered ( page 151). Speak the telephone number as a contnuous strng or, wth longer phone numbers (more than fve dgts), n form of dgt blocks (three to fve dgts). After each dgt block (separate the dgt blocks by usng an approx. 0.5 second pause), the Voce Control System repeats the recognzed dgts and wats untl you contnue speakng. After the command Save, you wll be prompted to enter the name twce (maxmum up to four tmes). The Voce Control System may recognze names even f not saved n your voce. For optmum call-up performance, however, you yourself should speak and save the names you ntend to use. Sample dalog: s Save name t The number, please s Zero one three zero t Zero one three zero s Fve zero zero fve t Fve zero zero fve s Save t The name, please s Servce Maybach t Agan s Servce Maybach t Name and number are set Dal name (Phone book) Use the command Dal name to place a phone call by selectng a name prevously saved n your personal phone book. Sample dalog: s t s t Dal name Call <voce entry> (Phone book) Use the command Call <voce entry> to place a phone call by drectly selectng a name prevously saved n your personal phone book. Each phone book entry s assocated wth one phone number. Sample dalog: The name, please Smth offce Callng Smth offce s Call Smth offce t Callng Smth offce 154

156 Delete name (Phone book) Use the command Delete name to delete a name from your personal phone book. Sample dalog: s t s t s t Delete name The name, please Smth offce Smth offce: Would you lke to delete the voce name? Yes The voce name s deleted Lst phone book and dalng a phone number Use the command Lst phone book to lsten to the entre phone book or select an entry and dal that number. Sample dalog: s Lst phone book The system reads out the complete phone book entry by entry. Selectng an entry and dalng that number Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. or Press button s on the multfuncton steerng wheel. The system reads out the name of the selected entry and dals the correspondng number. Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone Delete phone book Use ths command to delete the complete phone book or one or more voce entres from the phone book. Sample dalog: s t s t s t Delete phone book Would you lke to delete all voce names? Yes Are you sure? The system deletes the complete phone book. The deleton of the phone book cannot be undone. or s Yes The phone voce names have been deleted No The system starts readng the phone book. 155

157 Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone When the system reads the voce entry to be deleted: Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. The voce entry to be deleted s selected. The name of the selected voce entry s read out once more. t s t Smth offce: Would you lke to delete the voce name? Yes The voce name s deleted The voce entry s erased and the remanng phone book entres are read out. or or s The system announces the precedng voce name. You may now contnue wth the dalog. or s Back Cancel The dalog s concluded. The system confrms Cancel. Cancelng the dalog Brefly push the operatng lever to poston 0. Copyng cell phone phone book entry to Voce Control phone book and addng voce entry In telephone mode, press soft key Phone book on the audo system. Ths dsplays the lst of phone book entres saved on your cell phone. Press soft key s to assgn a name to a phone number coped from the phone book of your cell phone. The cell phone entry s coped to the Voce Control System and remans avalable even f you change cell phones. The Voce Control System prompts you to enter the name twce. s No The system contnues readng the phone book lst entry by entry. 156

158 Voce Control Front Cabn Telephone Sample dalog: t s t s t The name, please Smth offce Agan Smth offce Name and number are set Playng voce entry If you wsh to hear the voce entry: In telephone mode, press soft key "s Play" on the COMAND. Deletng the voce entry If you wsh to delete the voce entry: In telephone mode, press soft key "Delete" on the COMAND. t Would you lke to delete the voce name? s Yes t The voce name s deleted 157

159 Voce Control Front Cabn Rado Rado G Warnng! Rado Please devote your attenton frst and foremost to the traffc stuaton you are n. Before your journey, please famlarze yourself wth the rado functons. Only use the Voce Control System when road and traffc condtons permt you to do so. Otherwse you could be nvolved n an accdent n whch you or others could be njured. Rado operaton The Voce Control System gves you the capablty to: Select a staton Seek a staton Select a specfc frequency Scan statons Save up to 15 statons n your staton lst Select frequency band (FM or AM) Select weatherband Delete staton (from staton lst) Lst the staton lst Delete the staton lst To operate the rado usng the Voce Control System, the Voce Control System must be actvated ( page 148). Selectng rado mode: Brefly pull operatng lever to poston!. Speak the command Rado. Brefly pull operatng lever to poston!. Speak one of the rado commands. Rado commands For a complete lst of commands ( page 166). Help Rado The Voce Control System reads out an opton lst of avalable commands that can be used. Selectng frequency band (FM, AM) or weatherband Use the commands FM AM Weatherband to select the desred frequency band or swtch the rado to the weatherband. 158

160 Seek Use the command Seek for the Voce Control System to actvate the seek functon and tune the rado to the next avalable staton. Selectng frequency (FM, AM only) You may, for example, select a frequency n the FM band (87.9 to Megahertz) drectly usng a verbal command such as Nnety-fve fve. The Voce Control System also recognzes the words frequency, pont and megahertz. You may for example use the command Frequency nnety-fve pont fve. Sample dalog: s Nnety-fve pont fve megahertz The Voce Control System tunes the rado to frequency FM Scan Use the command Scan (AM and FM only) to scan the avalable rado statons. Each avalable rado staton wll be played for ten seconds. To cancel Scan : Brefly push the operatng lever to poston 0. The staton scan s cancelled. Save staton (Staton lst) Use ths command to save the set staton (AM and FM only) by name n your personal staton lst. After usng ths command, the Voce Control System wll prompt you to repeat the name two to four tmes before t s saved n the staton lst. The Voce Control System may recognze names even f not saved n your voce. For optmum performance, however, call up only names you have saved yourself. You can freely select the staton name, for example Favorte staton. Sample dalog: s t s t Save staton Staton, please Smooth Jazz Agan Voce Control Front Cabn s t Smooth Jazz Select staton (Lst saved statons) Rado Use the command Select staton (AM and FM only) to select a saved staton name from your staton lst. Sample dalog: The staton s set s Select staton t Staton, please s Smooth Jazz t Smooth Jazz The rado tunes to the correspondng frequency. 159

161 Voce Control Front Cabn Rado Staton Smooth Jazz (Lst saved statons) Use ths command (AM and FM only) to drectly select a saved staton name from your staton lst. Sample dalog: s t Staton Smooth Jazz Smooth Jazz The rado tunes to the correspondng frequency. If the Voce Control System does not recognze the staton name you requested, please refer to the secton Staton lst ( page 160). By followng the dalog, you can check and determne f the name s saved n the staton lst. Staton lst and select staton from lst Use ths command to lst the entre staton lst, or to select an entry from the staton lst. Sample dalog: The Voce Control System reads out the entre lst. To select a staton: When the system reads the desred staton: Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. The system reads out the selected staton once more and then tunes the rado to the correspondng frequency. To cancel the dalog: Brefly push the operatng lever to poston 0. The dalog s concluded. The system confrms Cancel. Delete staton (Lst saved statons) Use the command Delete staton (AM and FM only) to delete a staton from your personal staton lst. Sample dalog: s Staton lst s Delete staton t Staton, please s Smooth Jazz t Would you lke to delete Smooth Jazz? s Yes t The staton s deleted 160

162 Delete staton lst Use ths command to delete the complete staton lst or one or more statons from the staton lst. Sample dalog: s t s t s t Delete staton lst Would you lke to delete the staton lst completely? Yes Are you sure? Yes The staton lst s deleted The system deletes the complete staton lst. The deleton of the staton lst cannot be undone. or The system starts readng the staton lst. When the system reads the staton to be deleted: Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. The staton to be deleted s selected. The name of the selected staton s read out once more. t s t Would you lke to delete Smooth Jazz? Yes The staton s deleted The staton s erased and the remanng staton entres are read out. or Voce Control Front Cabn s Rado The system contnues readng the staton lst entry by entry. or s The system announces the precedng staton. You may now contnue wth the dalog. or s No Back Cancel The dalog s concluded. The system confrms Cancel. s No 161

163 Voce Control Front Cabn CD player CD player CD player CD player operaton The Voce Control System gves you the ablty to: Select a track Select next track Repeat a track Scan tracks To operate the CD player usng the Voce Control System, the Voce Control System must be actvated ( page 148). Selectng CD mode: Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. Speak the followng command: CD player Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston!. Speak one of the CD player commands. CD player commands For a complete lst of commands ( page 167). Help CD Use the command Help CD player and the Voce Control System wll read out a complete lst of avalable commands for the CD player. CD track 1 to CD track 39 Use the commands CD track 1 to CD track 39 to select one of up to 39 ttle numbers of a loaded CD. Next track Use the command Next track to select the next track. Repeat track Use the command Repeat track to play agan the track you are lstenng to. If the command Repeat track s used wthn the frst 10 seconds of a gven track, the system wll start playback of the prevous track. Scan Use the command Scan to play every ttle for ten seconds. To cancel CD scan: Brefly push the operatng lever to poston 0. CD scan s cancelled. 162

164 MP3 player MP3 player MP3 player operaton The Voce Control System gves you the ablty to: Select a track Select next track Repeat a track Scan tracks To operate the MP3 player usng the Voce Control System, the Voce Control System must be actvated ( page 148). Selectng MP3 mode: Brefly pull operatng lever. Speak the followng command: CD player Brefly pull operatng lever. Speak one of the MP3 player commands. MP3 player commands For a complete lst of commands ( page 167). Next track Use the command Next track to select the next track. Track 1 to Track 39 Use the commands Track 1 to Track 39 to select one of up to 39 ttle numbers of a loaded MP3-CD. Voce Control Front Cabn MP3 player Repeat track Use the command Repeat track to play agan the track you are lstenng to. If the command Repeat track s used wthn the frst 10 seconds of a gven track, the system wll start playback of the prevous track. Scan Use the command Scan to play every ttle for 10 seconds wthn the current folder. To cancel MP3 scan: Brefly push operatng lever. MP3 scan s cancelled. 163

165 Voce Control Front Cabn Command lst Command lst Command lst The Chapter Command lst gves you an overvew of all commands avalable for use to control the Voce Control System. Whch commands are avalable for use s dependent on the equpment level n your vehcle. Some functons can be operated usng several dfferent commands. In the followng lst, these commands are grouped n one cell. Choose your preferred command from those avalable. Global commands appear n talc style. Local commands appear n regular style. General commands Cancel CD CD on Sngle CD Sngle CD on CD player CD player on Help Help functon General help General hnts Help voce recognton Help voce control Help voce control system Help phone Help telephone Help functon phone Help functon telephone Help tuner Help functon tuner Help rado Help functon rado Rado help Tuner help Help CD Help functon CD CD help 164

166 Voce Control Front Cabn Command lst Telephone Telephone commands Phone <voce entry> Telephone on Dal name Call <voce entry> Phone Dal voce name Telephone <voce entry> Phone on Dal voce tag Redal Rado Dal number Redal number Rado on Dal phone number Redal phone number Tuner Number Dal last number Tuner on Phone number Dal last phone number Map 1 Enter unlock code Lst phone book Navgaton 1 Input unlock code Play phone book 1 Wth the commands "Map" and "Navgaton" you can swtch to the Navgaton map at any tme. Enter lock code Input lock code Delete phone book Delete name Enter pn code Delete saved name Input pn code Delete voce name Delete voce tag Delete <voce entry> Erase <voce entry> Save number Save phone number Save name 165

167 Voce Control Front Cabn Command lst Lst phone book Read phone book Read out phone book Get phone book Lst saved names Play saved names Read saved names Read out saved names Get saved names Lst names Play names Read names Read out names Get names Store number Store new entry Save name Audo commands Rado (Example: 95.5 FM) Nnety-fve fve Nnety-fve fve megahertz Nnety-fve pont fve Nnety-fve pont fve megahertz Frequency nnety-fve fve Frequency nnety-fve pont fve Frequency nnety-fve fve megahertz Frequency nnety-fve pont fve megahertz AM FM Weatherband Save staton Store staton Select staton Staton <voce entry> Go to <voce entry> Delete staton Delete staton lst Delete saved statons Play staton lst Lst staton lst Read staton lst Read out staton lst Get staton lst Lst statons Play statons Save new entry Save number Save phone number 166

168 Voce Control Front Cabn Command lst Read statons Read out statons Get statons Lst saved statons Play saved statons Read saved statons Read out saved statons Get saved statons Scan Staton scan Rado scan Rado next staton Tuner next staton Tuner seek Seek Next staton Rado seek CD player commands CD next track Next track Seek CD seek Scan CD scan Track 1-39 Track number 1-39 Load track number 1-39 Load CD track number 1-39 Load track 1-39 Select track 1-39 Select track number 1-39 Select CD track number 1-39 Start over Back Go back Replay Replay track Repeat Repeat track MP3 player commands See CD player commands ( page 167). 167

169 Voce Control Front Cabn Command lst Sub commands 0-9 Star Pound Correct Correct number Correct phone number Correcton Store Store number Store phone number Store name Store telephone number Store code Store unlock code Store PIN Store PIN code Store PIN number Save Save number Save phone number Save telephone number Save name Save code Save unlock code Save PIN Save PIN code Save PIN number Confrm PIN Confrm PIN code Confrm PIN number Confrm Confrm number Confrm phone number Dal Dal number Dal phone number Send Send number Send phone number 168

170 Practcal hnts Practcal hnts Help functon To support the user, the Voce Control Systems contans an extensve help functon. The help functon gves you: General hnts on how to best use the Voce Control System A lstng of all avalable commands Help commands General help Usng the command General help wll gve you nformaton on how to best use the Voce Control System. Help In a man menu, help can be accessed at any tme by sayng the command Help. The Voce Control System wll then read out the avalable functons and commands of all systems. In a submenu, help can also be accessed at any tme by sayng the command Help. The Voce Control System wll then read out an opton lst of all avalable functons and commands avalable n the partcular submenu. Voce Control Front Cabn Practcal hnts You can also use the help functon to access help for a specfc system. To access help for the phone operaton, you would speak the command Help Telephone. If you wsh to hear the last command read out: Brefly pull the lever to poston!. If you actvated the vsual help, a lst of the avalable commands wll appear on the CO- MAND dsplay ( page 149). Help screen You can use the help screen to vew a selecton of vald commands on the COMAND dsplay. If you actvated the help screen, a lst of the avalable commands wll appear on the COMAND dsplay ( page 172). 169

171 Voce Control Front Cabn What to do... What to do... What to do... Problem Possble cause/consequence Suggested soluton Voce Control System does not recognze a staton lst entry. Should nterference occur durng the process of storng a name, the Voce Control System prompts you to repeat your voce entry a thrd and fourth tme. If the nterference contnues, the dalog s stopped. The voce entres for the staton names sound too smlar. Both voce entres dffer. When you create your phone book entres, select names wth the greatest possble acoustc dfferences. Speak the command Lst staton lst. The system reads out the staton lst entry by entry. Brefly pull operatng lever when the desred staton name s beng read out. The staton s selected ( page 159). Pronounce the voce entres both tmes n the same manner. 170

172 Voce Control Front Cabn What to do... Problem Possble cause/consequence Suggested soluton Voce Control System does not recognze commands. You have not operated the system from the drver s seat. Operate the Voce Control System only by the drver as the mcrophone s geared to the drver sde. You have spoken unclearly, too loudly or too quetly. Speak the commands n a contnuous manner usng a normal tone. A blower s set to the hghest settng, vents are ponted at mcrophones or wnd nose s beng created through open wndows. Avod loud dsturbances. Voce Control System does not recognze a phone book entry. The voce entres n the phone book sound too smlar. When you create your phone book entres, select names wth the greatest possble acoustc dfferences: If for example you have the names Smth and Schmdt, choose for example Smth offce or Schmdt John. Speak the command Lst phone book. The system reads out the phone book entry by entry. Brefly pull operatng lever when the desred entry s beng read out. The entry s selected and the correspondng number s daled ( page 155). 171

173 Voce Control Front Cabn Vsual help Vsual help Vsual help A lst of the avalable commands can also be dsplayed on the man dsplay on the audo system. You can actvate or deactvate the help text (VC Tps). Please refer to Voce control settngs ( page 47) for nformaton on how to actvate and deactvate the help text (VC Tps). The help text (VC Tps) wll be dsplayed f you: Brefly pull the operatng lever to poston! to actvate the Voce Control System. Brefly push the operatng lever to poston 0. Call up varous dalogs. 172

174 Indvdualzaton Indvdualzaton The ndvdualzaton can only be performed when the vehcle s statonary. When you drve off, the ndvdualzaton wll be cancelled. The ndvdualzaton s used to adapt the voce control to your own voce and to therefore mprove speech recognton. Ths does not affect the speech recognton of other users. Indvdualzaton conssts of two stages: Dgts Commands You can actvate ndvdualzaton n the COMAND system settngs ( page 48). A dalog and screen dsplays wll gude you through the ndvdualzaton process. The system can be reset to the factory settngs at any tme. Voce Control Front Cabn Indvdualzaton You may wsh to complete only a porton of the ndvdualzaton process. Completng the dgts porton alone may result n an mproved recognton rate. Indvdualzaton can be exted at any tme. The data traned, however, wll only be retaned f a gven ndvdualzaton porton s completed and the data s saved when prompted to do so by the system. 173

175 174

176 Servce - Front Cabn Tele Ad

177 Servce - Front Cabn Tele Ad Tele Ad Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Tele Ad ncorporates the followng functons: Emergency call system Roadsde Assstance Informaton Emergency call system For certan emergency stuatons the system automatcally trggers an emergency call. An emergency call can also be trggered manually. Refer to your vehcle Operator's Manual for addtonal nformaton. Connectng appears on the dsplay f the system ntates an emergency call. Durng the emergency call message Call connected s dsplayed. Operaton from CO- MAND s not possble. Roadsde Assstance Roadsde Assstance wll assst when you are experencng techncal problems wth your vehcle. Roadsde Assstance can be requested manually. Refer to your vehcle Operator's Manual for addtonal nformaton. Upon request of Roadsde Assstance, the system ntates the call to the Assstance Center. Connectng appears on the dsplay. Call connected appears on the dsplay when the connecton s establshed. Even after termnaton of the connecton, the servce may reman actve for up to 5 mnutes n order to transmt any requred data. Durng ths tme, phone calls cannot be made, nor can SMS messages be receved. Durng actvaton of a Roadsde Assstance call, t s not possble to swtch to another applcaton. The transmtted data can contan, e.g., text messages or address detals for a Maybach Studo. Text messages Press after readng the message. The message dsappears. Route gudance A prompt appears for confrmaton f route gudance to the address s to be started. Press to select the Yes menu tem and confrm wth. The system starts the route calculaton, and subsequently the route gudance to the defned address ( page 118). Endng the connecton On the COMAND control unt Press. On the multfuncton steerng wheel Press t. COMAND reverts to the system prevously actve before Tele Ad was actvated. 176

178 Informaton A call to the Assstance Center wll be ntated. Informaton regardng the operaton of your vehcle, the nearest authorzed Maybach Studo or Maybach products and servces s avalable to you. Refer to your vehcle Operator's Manual for addtonal nformaton. Connectng appears on the dsplay f a call to the Assstance Center s ntated. Call connected appears on the dsplay when the connecton s establshed. Even after the connecton has been termnated, the servce may reman actve for up to 5 mnutes n order to transmt any requred data. Durng ths tme, phone calls cannot be made, nor can SMS messages be receved. The transmtted data can contan, e.g., text messages or address detals for a Maybach Studo. Text messages Press after readng the message. The message dsappears. Route gudance A prompt appears for confrmaton f route gudance to the address s to be started. Press to select the Yes menu tem and confrm wth. The system starts the route calculaton, and subsequently the route gudance to the defned address ( page 118). Servce - Front Cabn Tele Ad 177

179 178

180 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Rado operatng elements CD operatng elements MP3 operatng elements TV operatng elements DVD operatng elements Telephone operatng elements. 190 Remote control Menu system Quck reference

181 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Rado operatng elements Rado operatng elements P

182 Functon 1 Dsplay 2 Descendng: Staton search Manual tunng Page Sound volume settng - decrease volume Turnng: Dsplay selecton Pressng: Dsplay actvaton 5 Sound volume settng - ncrease volume Reversal swtch between R and L control unt 193 Functon Page 7 Ascendng: Staton search Manual tunng ,,, Tunng staton FM/AM 219 Staton memory, selectng presets Confrmaton a Mute functon 200 b Dsplay swvel-out 203 c Dsplay swvel-n 203 d Headphones operaton ON/OFF 202 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Rado operatng elements Functon Page e Keypad cover Keys - are located behnd cover Enterng frequency manually Storng statons Requestng staton presets 219 f Swchng ON/OFF va remote control 198 g Audo/Vdeo man menu 216 h Dsplay ON/OFF 202 j Infra-red sensor k Swtchng the control unt ON/OFF

183 At a Glance - Rear Cabn CD operatng elements CD operatng elements CD operatng elements P

184 Functon 1 Dsplay 2 Track skp reverse Reverse Page Sound volume settng - decrease volume Turnng: Dsplay selecton Pressng: Dsplay actvaton 5 Sound volume settng - ncrease volume Reversal swtch between R and L control unt 193 Functon 7 Track skp forward Forward 8 and Selectng CDs and Selectng tracks Page Confrmaton a Mute functon 200 b Dsplay swvel-out 203 c Dsplay swvel-n 203 d Headphones operaton ON/OFF 202 At a Glance - Rear Cabn CD operatng elements Functon Page e Keypad cover Keys - are located behnd cover Selectng CDs Enterng track numbers f Swchng ON/OFF va remote control 198 g Audo/Vdeo man menu 216 h Dsplay ON/OFF 202 j Infra-red sensor k Swtchng the control unt ON/OFF

185 At a Glance - Rear Cabn MP3 operatng elements MP3 operatng elements P

186 At a Glance - Rear Cabn MP3 operatng elements Functon 1 Dsplay 2 Track skp reverse Reverse Page Sound volume settng decrease volume Turnng: dsplay selecton Pressng: dsplay actvaton 5 Sound volume settng ncrease volume Reversal swtch between R and L control unt 193 Functon 7 Track skp forward Forward 8,,, Selecton functons 9 Confrmaton Page a Mute functon 200 b Dsplay swvel-out 203 c Dsplay swvel-n 203 d Headphones operaton ON/OFF 202 Functon Page e Keypad cover Keys - are located behnd cover f Swchng ON/OFF va 198 remote control g Audo/Vdeo man menu 216 h Dsplay ON/OFF 202 j Infra-red sensor k Swtchng the control unt ON/OFF

187 At a Glance - Rear Cabn TV operatng elements TV operatng elements TV operatng elements P

188 Functon Page 1 Dsplay 2 Descendng: Program search Sound volume settng - decrease volume Turnng: Dsplay selecton Pressng: Dsplay actvaton 5 Sound volume settng - ncrease volume Reversal swtch be-tween R and L control unt 193 Due to the swtchover to all-dgtal TV networks, the TV functon s dsabled n devces produced for the US market. Functon Page 7 Ascendng: 244 Program search 8, Selecton keys 9 Confrmaton a Mute functon 200 b Dsplay swvel-out 203 c Dsplay swvel-n 203 d Headphones operaton ON/OFF 202 At a Glance - Rear Cabn TV operatng elements Functon Page e Keypad cover Keys - are located behnd cover Manual channel entry Program storng Program memory callng 244 f Swtchng ON/OFF va remote control 198 g Audo/Vdeo man menu 216 h Dsplay ON/OFF 202 j Infra-red sensor k Swtchng the control unt ON/OFF

189 At a Glance - Rear Cabn DVD operatng elements DVD operatng elements DVD operatng elements P

190 At a Glance - Rear Cabn DVD operatng elements Functon Page Functon Page Functon Page 1 Dsplay 2 Reverse skppng of chapters / scenes Fast reverse 3 Sound volume settng - decrease volume 4 Turnng: Dsplay selecton Pressng: Dsplay actvaton 5 Sound volume settng - ncrease volume 6 Reversal swtch between R and L control unt Forward skppng of chapters / scenes Fast forward ,,, Selecton keys 9 Confrmaton a Mute functon 200 b Dsplay swvel-out 203 c Dsplay swvel-n 203 d Headphones operaton ON/OFF 202 e Keypad cover Keys - are located behnd cover Entry of ttle / chapter / ndex 253 f Swtchng ON/OFF va remote control 198 g Audo/Vdeo man menu 216 h Dsplay ON/OFF 202 j Infra-red sensor k Swtchng the control unt ON/OFF

191 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Telephone operatng elements Telephone operatng elements Telephone operatng elements 190

192 Functon Page 1 Dsplay 2 Sound volume settng - decrease volume Turnng: Dsplay selecton Pressng: Dsplay actvaton 4 Sound volume settng - ncrease volume Reversal swtch between R and L control unt 193 6,,, Selecton keys Functon Page 7 Confrmaton 8 Answerng calls Startng connecton Redalng Dsplay swvel-out 203 a Dsplay swvel-n 203 b Servce man menu c Keypad cover Keys - are located behnd cover Enterng PIN Enterng unlock code Speed dal At a Glance - Rear Cabn Telephone operatng elements Functon Page d Swtchng ON/OFF va remote control 198 e Dsplay ON/OFF 202 f Endng or refusng a call 270 g Infra-red sensor h Swtchng the control unt ON/OFF 198 To allow you to make phone calls, the rear cabn s also equpped wth the rear-cabn telephone system ( page 282). 191

193 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Remote control Remote control 192

194 Functon Page 1 Volume settng decrease volume 2 Turnng: Dsplay selecton Pressng: Dsplay actvaton 3 Volume settng ncrease volume 4 Swtch for controllng left 193 or rght rear-cabn dsplays 5 Keypad (cover open) 6 Keypad (cover closed) 7 Swtchng rear cabn control unt ON/OFF Battery charge ndcator 194 Basc operaton of the remote control The two rear cabn control unts can be operated va remote control. For ths purpose, the remote control can be set to control the left or rght rear-cabn dsplay control unt (see below). Swtchng remote control Shft the swtch 4 to R or L poston. R poston = R L L poston = R L R and L denote the rght and left rear cabn control unt to be remotely controlled. At a Glance - Rear Cabn Remote control Selectng tems on dsplay va remote control Use selecton wheel 2 on the remote control to select the desred dsplay. Turn the selecton wheel up or down. A menu tem on the dsplay s selected. The correspondng tem on the dsplay of the control unt changes color. Press the selecton wheel. The system performs the selected functon. 193

195 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Remote control Keypad cover The keypad 6 ( page 192) cover can be opened or closed. Addtonal keys are located behnd the cover. The keys are used to enter numerals. Battery charge ndcator Battery charge ndcaton LED 8 ( page 193) flashes f a remote control key s pressed, as long as the batteres are not depleted. Flashng Red: Batteres are nearly empty. Flashng Green: Batteres are charged. Replacng batteres Remove the cover 3 from battery compartment 1 located on the back of the remote control. To remove cover, push retaner clp 2 n arrow drecton, and pull cover 3 off. Remove the dscharged batteres 5 from the compartment. Insert new, fully charged batteres; be sure of correct polarty orentaton. Left battery: (+) must pont up. Rght battery: (+) must pont down. Insert the retaner noses 4 of cover 3 nto the compartment, press on the retaner clp 2 nto poston to close the cover. The remote control unt contans two "AAA" batteres of Type R V. 194

196 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Remote control G Warnng Keep batteres out of the reach of chldren. Immedately seek medcal help f a chld swallows a battery. Batteres are not to be short-crcuted, broken-down, or thrown nto fre. H Envronmental note Batteres contan materals that can harm the envronment f dsposed of mproperly. Recyclng of batteres s the preferred method of dsposal. Many states requre sellers of batteres to accept old batteres for recyclng. Only "AAA" batteres (Type R Volt) should be used. Rechargeable batteres are not recommended. Dspose of all old batteres. Do not mx new and partally dscharged batteres, nor batteres of dfferent types. Leakng batteres can damage the remote control. The batteres should be removed from the remote control f ts use s not ntended for a prolonged perod of tme. Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual.! COMAND Dsplay Do not touch the COMAND dsplay. The dsplay has a senstve surface; there s a rsk of scratchng. If the dsplay needs cleanng, use a commercally avalable alcohol and ammona-free TFT or LCD cleaner and a soft, antstatc, lnt-free cloth. 195

197 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Menu system Menu system Menu system Callng up man menus Menu dsplay The menu system allows for easy operaton From the front cabn control unt: of COMAND and the rear-cabn audovsual Audo front cabn ( page 52): system. Press key. A man menu for each of the followng SAT ( page 75): man functons s provded on the front Press key. cabn (drver s) control unt: Navgaton ( page 104): Audo Press key. (Rado, CD, MP3 and AUX (External audo source) operaton) Telephone front cabn ( page 88): Press key. SAT operaton Navgaton Servce front cabn ( page 176): Press key. Telephone From the rear-cabn control unts: Servce Audo/Vdeo rear cabn ( page 216): A man menu for each of the followng 1 Menu tems Press key man functons s provded on the rear cabn control unts: Servce rear cabn ( page 292): 3 Status bar 2 Man area Audo/Vdeo Press key (Rado, CD, TV, DVD and AUX operaton) Servce Rear cabn (Telephone, Navgaton, Servce) A dsplay can be composed of 3 sectons. Example: FM man menu, rear cabn control unt In the menu tems secton 1, the avalable functons for the current dsplay are shown. Messages or settngs are dsplayed n the man area 2. The settngs can be changed by operatng the controls accordngly. 196

198 I The status bar 3 s dvded nto three areas. Left sde: The selected operatng mode s shown. In ths example: Rado Center: Indcaton of the selected operatng mode. In ths example: FM = selected waveband 1 = selected staton stored on preset 1 Rght sde: General status nformaton s dsplayed, regardless of the selected operatng mode. In ths example: ROAMING = telephone s logged nto a moble communcatons network outsde your home network. = telephone sgnal strength Menu functons and submenus Usng the menu tems on the dsplay, functons can be swtched ON or OFF, or further submenus can be called up. Example: Rado man menu, rear cabn control unt: Item Scan swtches the scan search run ON or OFF. Item Autost. calls the submenu for the Autostore settngs. In certan stuatons, menu tems may not have any functon and thus are not operatonal. A menu tem wthout functon appears shaded-out. Example: Item Delete At a Glance - Rear Cabn Extng from submenus Menu system Select tem Back to ext from submenus. The dsplay swtches to the next hgher menu level. The system does not accept settng modfcatons unless they are stored. There are exceptons where usng tem Back wll also store new settngs. These exceptons, whenever applcable, are lsted on the followng pages. 197

199 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference Quck reference Quck referenced and the rear-cabn audovsual system are composed of the followng control elements: System structure Front cabn control unt, two rear cabn control unts wth one remote control unt, DVD drve located between the rear seats (n vehcles wth center rear seat: behnd rear center armrest), a CD change drve between the rear seats (n vehcles wth center rear seat: behnd center armrest) headphones for the rear cabn, AUX nterface located n the glove compartment, and AUX nterfaces located between the rear seats (n vehcles wth center rear seat: behnd rear center armrest). The COMAND s also nterconnected wth: the front cabn moble telephone, the voce control system, and the multfuncton steerng wheel and multfuncton dsplay. For further nformaton and references concernng the operaton of these nterlnked components, the correspondng operaton manuals should be studed thoroughly. The frst secton of ths manual covers the operaton of the front cabn control unt, and of the multfuncton steerng wheel. The second secton descrbes operaton of the system by remote control va the rearcabn control unt. Ths chapter provdes an overvew of all rear-cabn system components and a general descrpton of how they functon. More detaled nformaton can be found n the correspondng secton for each system component. Swtchng ON/OFF The ndvdual control unts can be swtched ON/OFF separately. Swtchng the front cabn control unt ON/OFF Swtchng ON Turn the key n the steerng lock to poston 1 or 2, or Press. In both cases, the system returns to the operaton mode actvated pror to swtchng OFF, or whch was accessed by a rear cabn system; or the basc menu appears f an Audo (Rado, CD) or Vdeo (TV, DVD) source was actvated n the rear cabn. Wthout the key n poston 1 or 2 of the steerng lock, the system automatcally swtches OFF agan after approx. 30 mnutes of nactvty. 198

200 Swtchng OFF Turn the key n the steerng lock to poston 0 and remove t, or Press. Swtchng the rear cabn control unts ON/OFF Swtchng ON Press key at the dsplay of the desred rear cabn control unt, or Wth gnton ON, or wth another control unt swtched ON, press key on the remote control. The Audo/Vdeo basc menu appears n both cases. Should one of the rear cabn control unts be swtched ON, the other one adapts the selected operaton mode. Wthout the key n poston 1 or 2 of the steerng lock, the system automatcally swtches OFF agan after approx. 30 mnutes of nactvty. Swtchng OFF Turn the key n the steerng lock to poston 0 and remove t, or Press key at the dsplay of the desred rear cabn control unt, or Press key on the remote control. Settng sound volume Separate volume settngs are possble for navgaton, telephone, and the voce control system. A common volume settng s provded for the operaton modes Rado, SAT, CD, MP3, AUX1, AUX2, DVD, and TV. The sound volume settng s stored automatcally for the currently actvated operaton mode. The volume for voce announcements can be adjusted separately on the front cabn control unt durng an announcement. The system stores the volume settngs when t s swtched OFF. After swtchng the system back on agan, the volume may be lower than at the tme when the system was swtched off. At a Glance - Rear Cabn The volume s lowered Quck reference f the system had been swtched OFF for longer than 15 mnutes, and f at swtchng OFF the volume was set at a value outsde a certan range. Vehcles wthout partton, and vehcles wth partton and partton open On the front cabn control unt, turn the rotary control, or Press key æ or ç on the multfuncton steerng wheel, or Press key æ or ç on the remote control. Dependng on the drecton of rotaton, or whch key was pressed, the volume s lowered or rased. The volume settng selected last s establshed by the system, regardless whch control unt had been used for the settng. The volume of the rear-cabn headphones can be adjusted separately. 199

201 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference Vehcles wth partton and partton closed On the front cabn control unt, turn the rotary control. or Press key æ or ç on the multfuncton steerng wheel. Dependng on the drecton of rotaton, or whch key was pressed, the volume n the front cabn area s lowered or rased. Press key æ or ç on the remote control. Dependng on whch key s pressed, the volume n the rear cabn area s lowered or rased. The volume of rear-cabn headphones can be adjusted separately. Automatc volume control The automatc volume control feature adjusts the sound volume dependng on the nteror ambent noses and other parameters (e.g. wndows open or closed). Mute functon COMAND can be muted ether on the front cabn control unt or on one of the rear cabn control unts. Mutng on the front cabn control unt See "Mute functon" ( page 52). Mutng on a rear cabn control unt Press key on the remote control. COMAND swtches the Mute functon ON or OFF. Symbol s dsplayed whle the mute functon s swtched ON. Changng operaton mode The followng operaton modes can be selected from the front cabn control unt: Audo (Rado, CD, MP3 and AUX mode), Satellte rado, Navgaton, Telephone, or Servce. The followng operaton modes can be selected from a rear cabn control unt: Audo (Rado, CD, AUX1, and AUX2 mode), Vdeo (TV, DVD), Navgaton, Telephone, Servce. Other control unts could be affected when selectng certan operaton modes. 200

202 Vehcles wthout partton Generally, the currently selected Audo or Vdeo operaton mode s actvated. If selecton s made on the front cabn control unt, the rear cabn control unts change to the Audo/Vdeo basc menu. Front sound actve s ndcated n the dsplay s status bar. Selecton of a dfferent Audo or Vdeo operaton mode on one of the rear cabn control unts also changes the other rear cabn control unt to ths mode. The front cabn control unt changes to the Audo or Vdeo man menu respectvely (f so equpped), and Rear sound actve s ndcated n the dsplay s status bar. Navgaton, Servce, and Telephone operaton are excluded from ths functonal process, they reman actve f another operaton mode s selected on another control unt, as n these operaton modes Audo and Vdeo sources always reman background-actve. When selectng operaton modes Telephone, Servce, or Navgaton from the rear cabn, they are executed by the front cabn control unt. Therefore, when actvatng these functons from the rear cabn, the front cabn control unt changes to the correspondng operaton mode. The actvated operaton mode can thus be controlled from the front cabn control unt as well as from the rear cabn control unts. At a Glance - Rear Cabn Vehcles wth partton Quck reference Partton closed Front cabn control unt and rear cabn control unts can be controlled separately. Only for operaton modes Telephone, Servce, or Navgaton can the front cabn control unt be accessed by a rear cabn control unt. Partton open COMAND functons dentcally as n a vehcle wthout partton. When openng the glass panel, the front cabn control unt adapts the Audo or Vdeo (f so equpped) operaton mode selected on a rear cabn control unt. When selectng another Audo or Vdeo operaton mode on a rear cabn control unt the other rear cabn control unt also changes to ths mode. The front cabn control unt changes to the Audo or Vdeo man menu respectvely (f so equpped), Rear sound actve s ndcated n the dsplay s status bar. 201

203 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference Headphones operaton Headphones lstenng s provded on both rear cabn control unts. Wth headphones n operaton, the operaton mode can be selected ndependently from the other rear cabn control unt. In the rear cabn, an operaton mode can be selected only one tme; e.g. the Rado mode cannot be started twce for lstenng to a dfferent rado staton; however, from ether rear cabn control unt, a staton can be selected for mutual lstenng by both. G Warnng The drver s not allowed to use headphones, as acoustc sgnals from the envronment, such as polce srens, are not dscernable, possbly causng an accdent. In many countres t s llegal for the drver to use headphones. Headphones operaton 1 Chrome label 2 Compartment for DVD drve Press chrome label 1. Compartment 2 opens up. Plug the headphones cables nto the headphones recaptacles located n the DVD compartment. Swtch the remote control to the desred rear cabn control unt. On the remote control, press key. A headphones symbol appears on the dsplay, the selected rear cabn control unt s swtched to headphones operaton. For volume control, press key æ or ç on the remote control. Dsplay The rear seat dsplays can be tlted as desred; they also can be swtched ON/OFF. Swtchng dsplay OFF On the remote control, press key. The dsplay s swtched OFF. The CO- MAND system stll plays. 202

204 Swtchng dsplay ON On the remote control, press key,, or turn the selecton wheel. The dsplay s swtched ON. Changng angle of dsplay unt On the remote control, press key or. The dsplay swvels n or out. Balance and Fader Balance and Fader Common balance settng and common fader settng s provded for the followng operaton modes: Rado operaton SAT operaton CD operaton MP3 operaton AUX operaton DVD operaton TV operaton Indvdual R/L balance and fader settngs are provded for Navgaton and Telephone. Balance/Fader settng for voce announcement s descrbed under "Adjustng the acoustcs for voce announcements" ( page 105). When adjustng the balance and/or fader settngs, the system automatcally stores the settngs for the actual operaton mode. Callng up the balance/fader menu In Rado, CD, MP3 or AUX operaton mode: Turn the remote control s selecton wheel to select tem Bal/Fad and press the selecton wheel to confrm. At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference The Balance/Fader menu appears on the dsplay. Balance and fader can now be adjusted ( page 203). In TV or DVD operaton mode: Turn the remote control s selecton wheel f the menu tems are faded-out. The menu tems appear on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Settng and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Settng menu appears on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Tone and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Tone menu appears on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Bal/Fad and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Balance/Fader menu appears on the dsplay. Balance and fader can now be adjusted ( page 203). Balance/Fader settng Call up the Balance/Fader menu ( page 203). 203

205 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference A cross-har cursor appears. The vertcal lne represents the balance settng. The horzontal lne represents the fader settng. On the remote control, press key or. The cursor moves horzontally, adjustng the balance accordngly; or On the remote control, press key or. The cursor moves vertcally, adjustng the fader accordngly. The cursor can be moved dagonally usng and. Press key on the remote control, or select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm, or Wat untl the dsplay swtches back. Settng Bass / Treble Indvdual R/L settngs of bass and treble are provded for the followng operaton modes: Rado operaton (FM wave range) Rado operaton (AM wave range) SAT operaton CD operaton (CD changer) CD operaton (Sngle CD) MP3 operaton AUX operaton TV operaton DVD operaton Navgaton operaton Bass and treble settngs for voce announcements are descrbed under "Adjustng the acoustcs for voce announcements" ( page 105). When adjustng the bass or treble settng, the system automatcally stores the settngs for the actual operaton mode. Callng up Bass or Treble menu In Rado, CD or MP3 operaton: Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Bass or Treble and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Bass or Treble menu appears on the dsplay. Bass or treble can now be adjusted as desred ( page 205). In TV, DVD, or AUX operaton: Turn the remote control s selecton wheel f the menu tems are faded-out. The menu tems appear on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Settng and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Settngs menu appears on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Tone and press the selecton wheel to confrm. 204

206 The Tone menu appears on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Bass or Treble and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Bass or Treble menu appears on the dsplay. Bass and treble can now be adjusted as desred ( page 205). Settng bass and treble Call up the Bass or Treble menu ( page 204). On the remote control, press key or. Ths adjusts bass or treble as desred. Press key on the remote control, or select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm, or Wat untl the dsplay swtches back. Sound functons The Sound functon s avalable for the followng operaton modes: Rado operaton SAT operaton CD operaton MP3 operaton TV operaton DVD operaton AUX operaton The followng functons for sound are avalable: Standard: Conventonal H-F playback. Front-optmzed: Playback optmzed for best sound playback for the front cabn. Rear-optmzed: Playback optmzed for best sound playback for the two rear cabns. Speech-optmzed: Playback optmzed for best speech playback. At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference Surround: Surround playback (not avalable for TV operaton and AM, WB wavebands n Rado operaton). Dependng on vehcles, vehcle settng, and actvated operaton mode, the sound functons can be ndvdually swtched ON/OFF. Examples: For CD operaton functon Default, for DVD operaton functon Surround. Vehcles wth partton: Wth partton closed between front cabn and rear cabn, Front-optmzed cannot be selected from the rear cabns, and Rear-optmzed cannot be selected from the front cabn. 205

207 At a Glance - Rear Cabn Quck reference Actvatng Sound functon In Rado or CD operaton: Call up the basc menu for the actual operaton mode ( page 196). Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem EQ and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Sound menu appears on the dsplay. 206 Surround playback offers a sound qualty superor to the conventonal stereo sound. Surround sound works wth all conventonal stereo audo sources (e.g. stereo CD or stereo rado). If the rado recepton s poor, the system should be swtched back to standard stereo playback. Swtchng back to standard stereo playback may mprove recepton qualty. Press key or on the remote control to select the desred functon. Press key on the remote control. The functon s actvated. In TV, DVD, or AUX operaton: Turn the remote control s selecton wheel f the menu tems are faded-out. The menu tems appear on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Settng and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Settng menu appears on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem Tone and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Tone menu appears on the dsplay. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem EQ and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Sound menu appears on the dsplay. Press key or on the remote control to select the desred functon. Press key on the remote control. The functon s actvated.

208 System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs

209 System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs System settngs Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. System settngs Callng up the System menu Press on the remote control. The System man menu appears. Select tem System usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Selectable soft keys The followng optons are avalable n the system settngs: Tme for settng the date and tme ( page 209). Lang. for settng the language ( page 210). Tones for swtchng confrmaton beeps or acoustc sgnals ON/OFF ( page 211). Dsplay for changng the dsplay settngs ( page 211). VC tps To call up the Voce control menu. ( page 213). Reset for swtchng COMAND to the factory settngs ( page 214). 208

210 Settng the date/tme Select tem Tme usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The tme/date settng dsplay appears. The followng optons are now avalable: Settng the tme ( page 209) Settng the date ( page 210) Settng the date/tme format ( page 210). Settng the tme The UTC tme transmtted by the GPS satelltes has to be set to the local tme zone. Ths enhances correct navgaton for routes wth tmedependent traffc gudance, and correct calculaton of the estmated tme of arrval. There s no automatc change from daylght savng tme to standard tme. Ths has to be changed manually. When you change the tme zone, the clock tme also changes automatcally. If you enter an ncorrect tme, the tme dfference remans unchanged when you change tme zone. Press or on the remote control to select hours or mnutes. System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs Press key or on the remote control. Dependng on the selecton, hours or mnutes can be set. Settng the mnutes: Wth GPS recepton, each tme or on the remote control s pressed, the mnutes change n ncrements of 30 mnutes. Wthout GPS recepton, the mnutes change n 1 mnute ncrements. Settng the hours: Each tme or on the remote control s pressed, the hours change n ncrements of 1 hour. Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The new settng s stored. 209

211 System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs Settng the date The date can be set only f GPS recepton s avalable. Press key or on the remote control to select the day, the month, and the year. Press key or on the remote control. Dependng on the selecton, the day, the month, or the year s set. Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The new settng s stored. Settng the Date/Tme format Select tem Format usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Date and tme are shown, followng the currently selected format as well as a lst of possble formats. Lst entry 1-3: Date formats Lst entry 4 and 5: Tme formats (Entry 5 s not vsble on the dsplay example below) Sold crcle : format set Empty crcle : format not set Settng the format: Press key or on the remote control to select a format. Press key on the remote control. The approprate format s selected. Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm or wat for the screen to change. Settng the language The language settng changes the dsplay language as well as the language used for voce announcements. When n the System menu ( page 208), select tem Lang. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The language lst s dsplayed. 210

212 Press key or on the remote control to select an entry. Press key on the remote control. Instr. cluster settngs: The system swtches to the language already selected n the vehcle nstrument cluster. Other optons: The system swtches to the requested language. Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Swtchng confrmaton beeps and acoustc sgnals ON/OFF When n the system menu ( page 208), select tem Tones usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The lst of avalable sound optons s dsplayed. Press key or on the remote control to select an entry. Press key on the remote control. The requested sound optons are swtched ON/Off. System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs The square next to a lst entry shows the status. Empty square = sound Off Sold square = sound On Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm or wat for the screen to change. The System menu appears. The new settng s stored. Dsplay settngs You can set the settngs of the dsplay for the drver control unt and for the dsplays of both rear cabn control unts. Callng up the front cabn control settngs menu Open the System menu ( page 208). Select tem Dsplay usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Dsplay settngs menu appears. 211

213 System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs Callng up the rear compartment control settngs menu Call up the Audo/Vdeo man menu ( page 216). Select Dsplay usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Dsplay settngs menu appears. Select tem Dsplay usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Dsplay settngs menu appears. Dsplay settngs The followng optons are avalable: Swtchng the dsplay desgn (day or nght), or Adjustng the dsplay brghtness. Settng the dsplay dmmng characterstcs You can select from 3 dsplay dmmng modes: Day mode: The dsplay s contnuously set to daytme desgn. Nght mode: The dsplay s contnuously set to nghttme desgn. Automatc: The desgn wll change dependng on the llumnaton of the nstrument cluster. Press key or on the remote control to select an entry. Press key on the remote control. Adjustng dsplay brghtness Select tem Brght. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Brghtness dsplay appears. Press or on the remote control to select the brghtness. The brghtness changes accordngly. Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm or wat for the screen to change. The new settng s stored. 212

214 Voce control settngs Use ths functon to: start or delete voce control ndvdualzaton actvate/deactvate the voce control help wndow Whle the help wndow can be called up and ndvdualzaton data can be deleted, operaton of voce control usng spoken commands s only possble from the drver s seat n the front cabn. Actvatng/deactvatng the help wndow Open the System menu ( page 208). Select VC tps usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Voce Control menu appears. Press on the remote control to select menu tem Help wndow. The status lst shows you whether the help wndow s actvated or deactvated. Press key on the remote control. The menu to actvate or deactvate the help wndow appears. The sold crcle shows whether the help wndow s actvated or deactvated. For example: help wndow s actvated System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs Press oder on the remote control to select the menu tem wth an empty crcle. Press key on the remote control. Actvate or deactvate the help wndow. Indvdualzaton The ndvdualzaton functon s used to adapt the voce control to your own voce and to therefore mprove the speech recognton. Ths does not affect speech recognton of other users. The ndvdualzaton functon can only be actvated from the drver s seat, as ths s where the mcrophone s. 213

215 System Settngs - Rear Cabn System settngs Deletng ndvdualzaton Ths functon s not avalable f no ndvdualzaton data have been saved. From the ndvdualzaton menu, press the key on the remote control to select Delete ndvdualzaton. Press on the remote control. A prompt appears, whch asks f you really want to delete the data. Press on the remote control to select Yes f you want to delete the data. Press the key on the remote control. The ndvdualzaton data are deleted. Reset functon Actvaton of the Reset functon allows resettng of COMAND to factory settngs. In addton, t allows deleton of: SMS: Deletng all SMS messages. Navgaton: Deletng all entres n the Destnaton memory and n the Last destnaton memory. Actvatng reset functon Call up the System menu ( page 208). Select tem Reset usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. A prompt appears askng f resettng the system and deletng the data s really ntended. If you want to reset the system, press key on the remote control to select tem Yes. Press key on the remote control. A promt appears agan askng whether or not resettng the system and deletng the data s really ntended. If you want to reset the system, press key on the remote control to select tem Yes. Press key on the remote control. Ths resets the entre system. If you do not want to reset the system and delete the data: Press key on the remote control to select tem No. Press key on the remote control. The reset screen dsappears. 214

216 Audo Rear Cabn Audo/Vdeo man menu Rado operaton CD operaton MP3 operaton

217 Audo Rear Cabn Audo/Vdeo man menu Audo/Vdeo man menu Audo/Vdeo man menu Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. The Audo/Vdeo man menu serves for swtchng between Audo and Vdeo sources: Rado (Wavebands FM, AM, and WB) CD TV DVD AUX 1 and 2 (External Audo/Vdeo sources) The currently actvated Audo or Vdeo source can also be swtched OFF. Callng up the Audo/Vdeo man menu Press key on the remote control. The Audo/Vdeo man menu appears. If one of the Audo submenus appears, select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm, or Press key agan on the remote control. Selectable menu tems Rado Staton settngs for WB, FM, and AM wavebands appear ( page 218). CD The CD man menu appears. TV The TV man menu appears ( page 242). DVD The DVD man menu appears ( page 249). AUX1 and AUX2 Facltate operaton of an external audo or vdeo source ( page 260) Due to the swtchover to all-dgtal TV networks, the TV functon s dsabled n devces produced for the US market. 216

218 Swtchng between audo/vdeo source Example: Swtchng to rado operaton. Press key on the remote control. Select tem Rado usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Rado man menu appears. The staton last tuned to of the waveband last selected becomes audble. Mute functon Swtchng the mute functon ON: Press on the remote control. The system s swtched to mute. Playback of CD and DVD operaton s n Pause status. Swtchng the mute functon OFF: Press on the remote control. The source heard s the one selected before the mute functon was actved. Audo Rear Cabn Audo/Vdeo man menu Swtchng actve audo/vdeo source on/off An actve audo/vdeo source can be swtched off manually. Swtchng off actve audo/vdeo source Call up the Audo/Vdeo man menu ( page 216). Select tem Off usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The actve audo/vdeo source s swtched off. Swtchng on audo/vdeo source Call up the Audo/Vdeo man menu ( page 216). Select the desred functon usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. 217

219 Audo Rear Cabn Rado operaton Rado operaton Rado operaton Swtchng to rado mode Call up the Audo/Vdeo man menu ( page 216). Select tem Rado usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Rado man menu appears. The staton last tuned to begns to play. In ths example: Weather Band Channel 1 = current staton Swtchng wavebands Select tem FM/AM usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Rado man menu for the FM or AM wavebands appears. The staton last tuned to begns to play. Select tem FM/AM agan to swtch between FM and AM wavebands. The waveband s ndcated n the center of the status bar. In ths example: FM = FM waveband (VHF) 1 = selected staton s stored on preset 1 The wavebands cover dfferent frequency ranges: FM waveband: FM broadcast band MHz tunng ncrements 0.2 MHz AM waveband: AM broadcast band khz tunng ncrements 10 khz WB waveband: WB (weather band) MHz tunng ncrements MHz 218

220 Tunng to an FM/AM staton The followng optons are avalable: Tunng va staton search ( page 219). Tunng va staton presets ( page 219). Tunng va Autostore presets ( page 220). Tunng va Scan search ( page 220). Manual tunng ( page 221). Tunng va drect frequency nput ( page 221). Tunng va staton search Swtch to the desred FM or AM waveband ( page 218). Press or on the remote control. The next recevable ascendng frequency s tuned n and begns to play, or Press or on the remote control. The next recevable descendng frequency s tuned n and begns to play. Tunng va staton presets Ten presets each are avalable for FM and AM. The presets are accessed usng the number keypad, or va the Memory menu. Accessng va number keypad Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 218). Press one of the number keys - on the remote control. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Audo Rear Cabn Rado operaton Accessng va Memory menu Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 218). Select tem Memory usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Memory menu appears. Use,,, or for selectng a preset and press, or Press one of the number keys - on the remote control. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. 219

221 Audo Rear Cabn Rado operaton Tunng va Autostore presets The Autostore functon allows placng of statons nto the presets sorted by recepton qualty ( page 223). The system stores the staton transmttng the strongest sgnal n preset 1. Ten presets each are avalable for FM and AM. Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 218). Select tem Autost. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Autostore preset lst appears. It can take several seconds untl all frequences are dsplayed. Use or on the remote control for selecton of a preset and press, or Press one of the number keys - on the remote control. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Tunng va Scan search Scan Search s characterzed as follows: Scan search plays each recevable staton for approx. 8 seconds. Scan search can be ended manually. Scan search performs two runs. Durng the frst run, statons wth extremely good recepton are played. Durng the second run, statons wth weaker recepton are played. The scan search automatcally stops at the staton lstened to before the scan search was started. Startng Scan search Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 218). Select tem Scan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Scannng begns. 220

222 Endng Scan search manually Select tem Scan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Manual tunng Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 218). Press or on the remote control to scroll up or down. Press and hold the key for at least 2 seconds. Manual tunng s actvated. Keep the key on the remote control pressed or release t and keep tappng t n quck successon. The frequency wll change by the tunng ncrements for the respectve waveband each tme the key s pressed or for as long as the key s pressed and held. Manual tunng s deactvated f the key s not pressed for approx. 3 seconds. FM waveband: tunng ncrements 0.2 MHz AM waveband: tunng ncrements 10 khz Manual tunng s also possble n all wavebands by pressng or. The frequency changes by the tunng ncrements for the respectve waveband each tme one of the keys s pressed. Frequency ncrements for manual tunng: FM 0.2 MHz AM 10 khz WB MHz Tunng va drect frequency nput Entry example: 98.5 MHz n FM waveband Swtch to the FM waveband ( page 218). Press on the remote control. Audo Rear Cabn Rado operaton The frequency nput dsplay appears. The frequency range of the FM waveband s shown. Open the keypad cover on the remote control. Press the number keys n successon:,, and on the remote control. Each number entered appears n the dsplay. The system tunes to the frequency entered (n ths example: 98.5 Mhz). The FM man menu appears after a bref delay. Entres outsde the frequency range are not possble. 221

223 Audo Rear Cabn Rado operaton Wthn the AM waveband, the nput s restrcted to frequences wthn the respectve frequency ncrement, whch s 10 khz. Tunng to a staton on Weather Band Tunng va staton search Seven channels are avalable on the Weather Band. In the Rado man menu, select tem WB usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The system wll tune to the strongest recevable staton. Press or on the remote control. Search begns n ascendng or descendng frequency. The search stops at the prevous / next recevable staton, or Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press one of the keys -. The system tunes to the staton stored under ths number. Select tem WB agan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The system agan tunes to the strongest recevable staton. The tuned-n staton may be a dfferent one. Storng statons Ten presets each are avalable for the FM and AM wavebands. The followng optons are avalable: Storng manually usng number keys ( page 222). Storng manually usng the Memory menu ( page 223). Storng usng Autostore ( page 223). Storng manually usng the number keys - Tune to the staton to be stored ( page 219). Press a number key between and on the remote control and hold t for more than 2 seconds. The staton s now stored n the respectve memory locaton. 222

224 Storng manually usng the Memory menu Tune to the staton to be stored ( page 219). In the Rado man menu, select tem Memory usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Memory menu appears. Use,, or on the remote control to select a preset. Press on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. The staton wll be stored n the respectve memory locaton. Storng usng Autostore The Autostore functon places statons nto the Autostore memory sorted by recepton qualty. The system stores the staton transmttng the strongest sgnal n preset 1. The Autostore feature stores presets n a separate memory, not n the regular presets seen under the Memory menu tem. Therefore the Autostore memory s only temporary. Swtch to the desred waveband ( page 218). Select tem Autost. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Autostore preset lst appears. Audo Rear Cabn Rado operaton Use on the remote control to select the Reprogram Autostore lst entry. Press on the remote control. The Autostore search starts. After a delay the new preset assgnment appears. The system tunes to the staton stored on preset 1. A staton can also be tuned-n from the Autostore preset lst ( page 220). 223

225 Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton CD operaton Safety Instructons CD operaton G Warnng The CD drve and CD changer are Class 1 laser products. There s a danger of nvsble laser radaton f the cover s opened or damaged. Do not remove the cover. The CD drve and the CD changer do not contan any parts servceable by the user. For safety reasons, have any necessary servce work performed only by qualfed personnel. Swtchng to the CD mode Call up the CD man menu ( page 229). CD changer The CD changer can play audo CDs. CD text data stored on a audo CD can also be read by the CD changer. In ths case, the system dsplays CD name and track name. CD changer n the storage compartments between the rear seats Accessng the CD changer Retractng the CD changer Close the cover. CD changer n the storage compartments (vehcles wth a center rear seat) Accessng the CD changer Tps on carng for your CDs Touch the CD only on the edges. Clean the CD wth a dry, lnt-free cloth. Wpe the CD straght from the center on out. Never wpe the CD n a crcular moton. Do not use rubbng alcohol or solvents to clean CDs. Do not expose the CDs to heat or drect sunlght. Do not wrte or affx labels on CDs. The system may not be able to play audo CDs wth copy protecton. Use only orgnal CDs. Usng coped CDs may cause malfunctons durng playback Chrome label 2 CD changer compartment Press chrome label 1. The CD changer compartment 2 opens up. 1 Armrest Pull the top of the armrest 1 out and fold t downward.

226 Loadng CDs! Do not attach labels of any type to the CD. They may become detached and damage the drve. Only use CDs whch bear the label shown and that conform to the compact dsc dgtal audo standard (IEC 60908). You can therefore only use CDs wth a maxmum thckness of 1.3 mm. Use of CDs whch do not meet ths standard may cause damage to the CD drve. Do not play sngle CDs (80 mm) wth an adapter.! The CD drve s desgned to play CDs whch correspond to the IEC standard. Therefore only CDs not exceedng a thckness of 1.3 mm can be used. If you nsert thcker data carrers, e.g. ones that have data on both sdes (one sde wth DVD data, the other sde wth audo data), they cannot be ejected; the drve could be damaged. Do not play sngle-cds (80 mm) wth an adapter. Only use 12 cm dameter CDs. The COMAND CD drve may not be able to play audo CDs wth copy protecton. Pror to nsertng CDs, t s necessary to access the CD changer ( page 224). Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton 1 CD slot 2 Magazne compartment keys The CD changer has a bult-n magazne accomodatng up to sx CDs. The CD changer has sx magazne compartment keys 2 for controllng the loadng procedure. LEDs n the keys ndcate the status of the correspondng magazne compartment. 225

227 Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton Key LED off: Magazne compartment empty Key LED steadly red: Magazne compartment contans a CD The status of a magazne compartment can also be seen when selectng a CD n the CD selecton menu ( page 229). The CD slot 1 for loadng CDs nto the CD changer s located above the keys 2. Loadng optons: Loadng a sngle magazne compartment ( page 226) Loadng all sx magazne compartments ( page 226) Loadng a sngle magazne compartment Loadng a magazne slot wll stop the playback of a CD n the changer. Access the CD changer ( page 224). Brefly press the key 2 of the empty magazne compartment to be loaded. Wat untl the LED n the key 2 flashes green. Ths ndcates that the CD changer s ready to receve a CD. Insert an audo CD nto the CD slot 1 wthn approx. 15 seconds. Insert the CD face up. The CD s retracted. The red LED n the correspondng magazne compartment key 2 lghts up steadly. The system begns playback of the CD. Retract the CD changer ( page 224). The loadng procedure s completed. Loadng all sx magazne compartments Intal stuaton: all magazne compartments are empty. The CD changer loads all compartments begnnng wth compartment 1. Access the CD changer ( page 224). 226

228 1 CD slot 2 Magazne compartment keys Press and hold the key 2 of an empty magazne compartment for more than 2 seconds. The LEDs of all magazne compartment keys 2 brefly lght up green several tmes. Wat untl the LED n the frst magazne compartment key 2 flashes green. Ths ndcates that the CD changer s ready to receve a CD. Insert an audo CD nto the slot 1 wthn approx. 15 seconds. The label of the CD must face up. The CD s retracted; the magazne compartment s loaded. The LED n the correspondng magazne compartment key 2 lghts up steadly. The CD changer then requests nserton of the next CD. The LED of the correspondng magazne compartment key 2 flashes green. Repeat the last step untl all sx magazne compartments are loaded. The system plays the sxth CD. The LEDs of all magazne compartment keys 2 lght up steadly. Retract the CD changer ( page 224). Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton For example, f only compartments 1 through 4 are to be loaded nstead of all sx compartments, smply do not nsert the ffth and sxth CD nto the slot 1. The CD changer attempts to load the ffth CD, yet aborts the loadng procedure. The system automatcally plays the last (fourth) CD. The loadng procedure s completed. 227

229 Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton Ejectng CDs The followng optons are avalable: Ejectng one CD ( page 228) Ejectng all CDs ( page 228) Ejectng one CD 1 CD slot 2 Magazne compartment keys Access the CD changer ( page 224). Brefly press the approprate magazne compartment key 2. The key LED 2 flashes red. The CD changer ejects the CD. Remove the CD from the slot 1 wthn 15 seconds. The CD s retracted agan unless t s removed from the slot wthn 15 seconds. The system resumes playback of the CD. The ejecton procedure s completed. Retract the CD changer ( page 224). The system nterrupts playback of a CD f another CD s ejected from ts magazne compartment n the CD changer. Playback s resumed upon completon of the ejecton procedure. If the CD currently beng played s ejected the message No CD appears brefly. Ejectng all CDs Access the CD changer ( page 224). Press and hold the key of a loaded magazne compartment 2 for more than 2 seconds. The key LEDs of all loaded magazne compartments wll brefly flash red several tmes. The CD changer ejects the CDs one after another. Wthn 15 seconds, remove each CD from the slot 1. The CD wll be retracted agan unless t s removed from the slot wthn 15 seconds. The system resumes playback of the CD. The ejecton procedure s completed when all CDs are removed, or when the procedure s aborted by the CD changer. 228

230 CD man menu Press key on the remote control. The Audo/Vdeo man menu appears on the dsplay. Select tem CD usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The CD man menu appears. 1 CD currently playng (CD number or, f avalable, CD name) 2 Track currently playng (track number or, f avalable, track ttle) 3 Elapsed track playng tme The CD lstened to prevously resumes playback. The unt plays the next avalable audo CD f the prevously played CD s no longer avalable. The system does not swtch to CD mode f no CD s avalable. The message No CD appears brefly. The system swtches back to the audo man menu f no audo CD had been loaded n the CD changer. Load an audo CD nto the CD changer ( page 225). Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton Selectng CD The numbers 1 through 6 are assgned to the CDs n the CD changer. Avalable choces: Selecton va CD lst ( page 229) Selecton va drect entry of the CD number ( page 230) Selecton va CD selecton menu ( page 230) Selectng va CD lst Selecton s possble only f two or more audo CDs are loaded. Only loaded CDs can be selected. The CD lst contans all loaded CDs. Only one entry s vsble at a tme. The entry appears above the track dsplay. It shows the number of the currently played CD. 229

231 Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton Press key or on the remote control to select another CD from the lst.the CD s changed. Playback of the newly selected CD begns. Selectng va drect entry of the CD number Selecton va drect entry s made usng the remote control s number keys -. Selecton example: CD No. 3 Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press key. The CD changes. Playback of the newly selected CD (No. 3) begns. The CD fals to be changed when selectng an empty CD compartment number. Selectng va CD Selecton menu Select tem CD-Sel. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The CD Selecton menu appears. neu Press key on the remote control. The CD s changed. Selectng a track The followng optons are avalable: Selectng va track skp ( page 230) Selectng va track lst ( page 231) Selectng va manual entry of the track number ( page 231) Selectng va scan search ( page 231) Selectng va track skp Call up the CD man menu ( page 229). Press for forward skppng, or Press for backward skppng. 230 Press key,,, or on the remote control to select a CD. Only loaded CDs can be selected.

232 Forward skppng: The next track s played. Backward skppng: The system skps back to the begnnng of the track f the elapsed playng tme of the track currently playng s more than approx. 10 seconds. The system skps back to the begnnng of the prevous track f the elapsed playng tme of the track currently playng s less than 10 seconds. Selectng va track lst The track lst contans all tracks of the currently played CD. Only one lst entry s vsble at a tme, t s the number of the track currently played. On the remote control, press key or to select another track from the lst. Press key on the remote control, or do not change the selecton. The selected track s played. Selectng va manual entry of the track number Open the CD man menu ( page 229). Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press key. The track nput dsplay appears. Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton On the remote control, press keys and n quck successon. Entres beyond the number of avalable tracks on the CD are not possble. Wat approx. 3 seconds after enterng the number. The selected track begns playback. The CD man menu appears. Selectng va Scan search Durng scan search, each track on the current CD s played for approx. 8 seconds. The scan search starts playback of each track of the current CD for approx. 8 seconds. It stops automatcally at the track lstened to before the scan search was started. It s also possble to end the scan search manually. Entry example: Track 1 On the remote control, press key. Entry example: Track

233 Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton Startng scan search Select tem Scan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. When startng the scan search, playback opton Normal track sequence s actvated automatcally ( page 232). Termnatng scan search manually Select tem Scan agan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The track playng at the tme the scan search s termnated remans on playback. 232 Fast forward/reverse Call up the CD man menu ( page 229). On the remote control, press and hold keys or for as long as fast forward/reverse s desred. To stop fast forward/reverse, release key or. Playback optons The followng optons are avalable: Normal track sequence Repeat CD Repeat track CD mx Track mx Explanaton of the playback optons Normal track sequence The tracks are played n the normal sequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). If only one CD s loaded, the last track s followed by renewed playback of the frst track. If several CDs are loaded n the CD changer, the last track on a CD n the changer wll be followed by the frst track of the next CD n the changer. The CDs are changed n ther normal sequence. Repeat track The current track wll be repeated untl ths functon s deactvated. Repeat CD The current CD wll be repeated untl ths functon s deactvated. CD mx It s only possble to select ths functon f at least two audo CDs are loaded n the CD changer. At least 4 tracks on one CD are played n random order (e.g. 5, 7, 3, 9). Then, the next CD wll be played. The CDs are changed n random order (e.g. CD 4, 1, 5 etc.). Track mx The tracks are played n random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). If several CDs are loaded n the CD changer, the last track on a CD n the changer wll be followed by the frst track of the next CD n the changer. The CDs are changed n ther normal sequence.

234 Audo Rear Cabn CD operaton Swtchng on the playback opton Example: Repeat track opton Select tem Settng usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Settng menu appears. Use or to select the Repeat track menu tem. Press. The opton s swtched on. After a short tme, the CD man menu appears. The actvated opton s shown n the status bar. 233

235 Audo Rear Cabn MP3 operaton MP3 operaton To play back dscs contanng MP3s n the rear cabn, use the DVD player. Its drve s capable of playng MP3s. Use the rear-cabn remote control to operate the MP3 functons. Incomng phone calls nterrupt MP3 playback. MP3 operaton Safety notes G Rsk of njury The MP3/DVD drve s a Class 1 laser product. There s a rsk of exposure to nvsble laser radaton f you open the casng, or f the casng s faulty or damaged. Do not open the casng. The MP3/DVD drve does not contan any parts that can be servced by the user. For safety reasons, have any necessary mantenance work carred out by qualfed aftersales techncans only. Notes about dscs! Do not affx stckers or labels to the dscs, as they could peel off and damage the drve.! The CD/DVD drve s desgned to take dscs whch comply wth the EN standard. You can therefore only use dscs wth a maxmum thckness of 1.3 mm. If you nsert thcker dscs, e.g. those that contan data on both sdes (DVD on one sde and audo data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the drve.! Dscs whch contan data on both sdes can cause playback problems as ther storage layers are thnner than those of one-sded dscs. Notes about handlng MP3 dscs Handle dscs carefully to prevent playback problems. Avod gettng scratches, fngerprnts and dust on dscs. Do not affx any stckers to the dscs. Only use a pen desgned for such a purpose to label dscs. Clean dscs from tme to tme wth a commercally-avalable cleanng cloth. Do not wpe them n a crcular moton, but only n straght lnes from the centre outwards. Place dscs back n ther cases after use. Protect dscs from heat and drect sunlght. 234

236 Notes on creatng MP3 dscs There s a large varety of dscs, dscwrtng software and wrters avalable. Ths varety means that there s no guarantee that t wll be possble to play every dsc that you have coped yourself. There may be playback problems f you play CDs that you have coped yourself wth a storage capacty of more than 700 MB. These CDs are not compatble wth currently applcable standards. Permssble MP3 dscs The followng dscs can be read n MP3 mode: CD-R CD-RW DVD-R DVD-RW Permssble fle systems MP3 dscs created n accordance wth ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 are supported. Mult-sesson dscs Wth multsesson dscs, the content of the frst sesson determnes how the dsc s processed. If the frst sesson contans data n audo CD format, for example, and the second sesson contans MP3 tracks, the dsc wll be treated as a standard audo CD. Ths means that t s not possble to access the MP3 tracks. If the frst sesson contans MP3 tracks, for example, and the second sesson contans data n audo CD format, the dsc wll not be treated as a standard audo CD. Ths means that t s not possble to access the audo CD tracks. Audo Rear Cabn MP3 operaton Fle structure When you create an MP3 dsc, the MP3 tracks can be organzed n folders. A folder can also contan subfolders. Nestng depth must not exceed eght. An MP3 dsc may not have more than 1,024 fles and 255 folders. If MP3 fles are stored n the root drectory tself, the root drectory wll also be treated as a folder and dsplayed as a folder name. Track and fle names When you create an MP3 dsc, you can assgn names to the MP3 tracks or folders. In MP3 mode, these names are shown n the dsplay. You must observe the followng when assgnng names: Track names must have at least 1character. For folder and fle names, use upper-case letters from A to Z, the dgts from 0 to 9 and the underscore character '_'. Track names must have the extenson "mp3". There must be a perod between the track name and the extenson. 235

237 Audo Rear Cabn MP3 operaton Example of a correct track name: Track1.mp3 In the example, the track name has sx characters followed by a perod and then the fle extenson "mp3". MP3 tracks are not recognzed f: there s no perod between the track name and the fle extenson there s no fle extenson Empty folders or folders whch contan data other than MP3 tracks are not dsplayed. Notes on creatng MP3 tracks Permssble MP3 formats The MP3 player supports the MPEG1 Audo- Layer 3 format. Ths format s generally known as "MP3" n everyday usage. MP3 dscs wrtten usng the "Track At Once" opton cannot be played back correctly. Permssble bt and samplng rates Fxed and varable bt rates up to 320 kbt/s Samplng rates of 32 khz 48 khz Notes on copyrght Musc tracks that can be played back n MP3 mode, or fles whch you save n MP3 format yourself, are generally subject to copyrght protecton n accordance wth the applcable nternatonal and natonal regulatons. In many countres, reproductons are not permtted wthout the pror consent of the copyrght holder, not even for prvate use. Make sure that you know the applcable copyrght regulatons and that you comply wth these. If you own these rghts yourself, e.g. for your own compostons and recordngs, or the copyrght holder has granted you permsson, these restrctons do not apply. Swtchng to MP3 operaton Load an MP3 dsc as descrbed n "Loadng MP3 dscs", page

238 Loadng MP3 dscs The MP3 player n the rear cabn has a capacty of 1 dsc. If there s already a dsc nserted, ths must be ejected before another s nserted. 1 Dsc slot 2 DVD player Slde an MP3 dsc nto the slot whle the MP3 player s swtched on. If the dsc has a prnted sde, t must face up. If nether sde of the dsc s prnted, the sde you wsh to play must face down. The MP3 player draws n the dsc and loads ts data. The loadng process takes a certan tme, dependng on the number of folders and tracks. Playback begns. REPEAT DISC mode s selected by default. Ejectng MP3 dscs Press the button. The MP3 player ejects the dsc. Take the dsc out of the slot. If you do not take the dsc out of the slot, the MP3 player wll automatcally draw t n agan after a short whle. Audo Rear Cabn MP3 operaton MP3 man menu, rear cabn Once the MP3 dsc's data has been loaded, you wll see the MP3 man menu for the rear cabn on the screen. 1 Fle format 2 Track currently playng and addtonal nformaton 3 Current samplng/bt rate 4 Track tme elapsed 5 Track's number n actve folder 6 Currently actve folder 7 Current playback mode 237

239 Audo Rear Cabn MP3 operaton Selectng a folder If you have organzed the MP3 tracks on the dscs nto folders, you can select a folder. Folder lst dsplay Whle the MP3 man menu for the rear compartment s shown, press the C button and then the button on the rearcabn remote control. The folder lst s shown. All those folders contanng MP3 tracks are shown. 1 Folder lst 2 Current page/total number of pages Dsplayng a folder's contents Use the or button on the rearcabn remote control to select a folder. Press the button. You see the track lst. Ths lst may cover more than one page. 1 Current folder 2 Track lst 3 Current page/total number of pages 4 MP3 symbol Scrollng through pages If the track lst covers more than one page, you can scroll through the pages. To scroll forwards, press the button on the rear-cabn remote control. or To scroll backwards, press the button on the rear-cabn remote control. Returnng to the folder lst On the rear-cabn remote control, press the C button and then the button. Swtchng menu levels On the rear-cabn remote control, press the C button and then the button. The system returns drectly to the MP3 man menu for the rear cabn. On the rear-cabn remote control, press the C button and then the button. The system swtches to the next hgher menu level. Repeat untl the desred menu level appears. 238

240 Selectng a track In MP3 mode, you can select tracks n one of the followng ways: Selecton from the track lst Selectng by skppng to tracks Selectng from the track lst The track lst contans all the tracks of the currently actve folder. You can select a track drectly. Use the or button on the rearcabn remote control to select a track. Press the button. You wll hear the selected track. Selectng by skppng to tracks To skp forwards to a track, press the button on the rear-cabn remote control durng MP3 playback. or To skp back to a track, press the button on the rear-cabn remote control durng MP3 playback. Fast forward/rewnd Press and hold the or button on the rear-cabn remote control durng MP3 playback. To stop, release the or button. Audo Rear Cabn MP3 operaton Playback optons The followng playback optons are avalable: Repeat fle Repeat folder Repeat dsc From the mp3 man menu: Use the scroll wheel to dsplay the soft keys. Select Settng. Select Optons. Select Repeat. Press the scroll wheel to select the desred repeat mode. 239

241 240

242 Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton DVD operaton Vdeo AUX operaton

243 Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton TV operaton Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. TV operaton General Informaton Durng a journey, recepton nterferences can occur due to contnuously changng recepton condtons. An mage memory can brdge such nferferences, a stll mage appears on screen. A background recever contnually searches for alternatve channels wth better recepton of the same program contents. Swtchng to TV operaton Press key on the remote control. When n the Audo/Vdeo man menu, select tem TV usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The prevously selected TV program appears on the screen, provded t can stll be receved. Tunng-out of mage and audo Reactng to poor recepton condtons, the system can termnate mage as well as sound. Correspondng symbols appear on the dsplay: No mage: No sound: Nether mage nor sound: TV dsplay and TV status bar When swtchng to TV operaton, the TV menu tems and the TV status bar ntally are automatcally faded-out. Fadng-n of TV menu tems and TV status bar When n TV operaton mode, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. The screen mage s reduced, TV dsplay and status bar appear on the screen. The program currently tuned to s ndcated n the status bar. Due to the swtchover to all-dgtal TV networks, the TV functon s dsabled n devces produced for the US market. 242

244 1 TV dsplay 2 Status bar After 8 seconds of nactvty, the system automatcally removes (fades-out) menu tems and status bar. Fade-out can also be ntated manually. Fadng-out TV menu tems and status bar manually Select tem Full scn. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Functons of the TV menu tems Item Memory: Accesses the memory menu for the storage of programs ( page 245), and for recall of stored programs ( page 244). Item Full scn.: For fadng-out of the TV dsplay ( page 243). Item Scan: For startng the Scan search run ( page 244). Item Settng: Accesses the menu for TV basc settngs ( page 245). Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton Program selecton The followng possbltes are provded: Selectng va program lst ( page 243). Selectng va program search run ( page 244). Selectng from program memory ( page 244). Seletng va scan search run ( page 244). Selectng va manual channel entry ( page 245). Selectng va program lst The program lst contans all dentfed TV programs. Only one entry s vsble at any tme. On the remote control, press key or. The program lst appears. 243

245 Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton Press key or on the remote control to select another program. Press key. The program lst dsappears. After a bref perod of tme, the program lst dsappears automatcally f key s not pressed. Selectng va program search run Press key or on the remote control. Search run starts up or down as selected, t stops at the next recevable program. Selectng from program memory 10 TV memory spaces are avalable. Selecton s possble ether va number keys or va memory menu. Selectng va number keys Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press one of the keys -. The system tunes to the selected stored program. Selectng va memory menu Have the TV dsplay faded-n ( page 242). Select tem Memory usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The memory lst appears. Press key or on the remote control to select a program. Press key on the remote control. The system tunes to the selected program. Selectng va scan search run Scan search plays each recevable program for approx. 8 seconds. The scan search run stops automatcally at the program tuned pror to scan search. Have the TV dsplay faded-n ( page 242). Select tem Scan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The search run starts. Select tem Scan agan usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The search run stops. 244

246 Selectng va manual channel entry Example: Channel 12 to be selected: Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press key. On the remote control, press keys and. The system tunes to ths channel. Program storage Two possbltes are provded: Storng va number keys ( page 245). Storng va memory menu ( page 245). Storng va number keys Open the keypad cover on the remote control, press and hold one of the keys - longer than 2 seconds. Storng va memory menu Have the TV dsplay faded-n ( page 242). Select tem Memory usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The memory lst appears. On the remote control, press key or to select a memory number. Press and hold key on the remote control longer than 2 seconds. The program currently tuned to s beng stored under the selected memory number. TV basc settngs When n the Settngs menu, the followng submenus can be called up: Pcture ( page 245) Tone ( page 247) Country ( page 246) Full scn. ( page 243) CH-Fx ( page 247) Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton Callng up the TV basc Settngs menu Durng TV operaton, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. Select tem Settng usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The TV basc Settngs menu appears. Pcture The followng settngs can be adjusted n the Pcture menu: Brghtness ( page 246) Contrast ( page 246) Color ( page 246) Full screen ( page 243) Format ( page 246) 245

247 Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton Callng up the Pcture menu Durng TV operaton, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. Select tem Pcture usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Settng pcture format Call up the Pcture settngs menu ( page 245). Select tem Format usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Country settng There s normally no reason to change ths settng. The system automatcally detects the recevable programs. An ncorrect settng can cause the followng problems: Pcture and/or sound problems. Problems when decodng the program descrptons, and ensung problems when searchng for alternatve channels. The Pcture settngs menu appears. Settng brghtness/contrast/color Call up the Pcture settngs menu ( page 245). Select tem Brght., Contr. or Color usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Press key or on the remote control. The selected settng changes accordngly. Select tem 16:9 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The screen swtches from format 4:3 to format 16:9; or Select tem 4:3 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The screen swtches from format 16:9 to format 4:3. Correct country settng ensures program playback n acceptable qualty. The country of current presence should be entered. Call up the Pcture settngs menu ( page 245). Select tem Country usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Pcture settngs menu appears. 246

248 The followng dsplay appears: Select tem Yes usng key on the remote control. Press key on the remote control. A lst of countres appears. Press key or on the remote control to select the desred country. Press key on the remote control. The selected country settng s entered. Fxatng channel Ths functon prevents unwanted alternatng appearance of two or more TV programs n case of unfavorable recepton condtons. Swtchng the functon ON Call up the Pcture settngs menu ( page 245). Select tem CH Fx usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The functon s actvated. The con Fx appears on the dsplay. Swtchng the functon OFF Call up the Pcture settngs menu ( page 245). Select tem CH Fx usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The functon s deactvated. The con Fx dsappears on the dsplay. The functon s automatcally deactvated when tunng-n another program, or when swtchng the system OFF/ON. Callng up the Tone menu Vdeo - Rear Cabn TV operaton Call up the Settngs menu ( page 255). When n the Settngs menu ( page 255), select tem Tone usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The followng functons can be called up and adjusted n the Tone menu: Bass ( page 204) Treble ( page 204) Balance and Fader ( page 203) Sound ( page 205) 247

249 Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton DVD operaton DVD operaton Safety Instructons G Warnng The DVD drve s a laser product of class 1. Danger of nvsble laser radaton exsts when openng the housng, or f the housng s damaged. G Warnng The housng must not be opened. The DVD drve does not contan servceable parts. For safety reasons, requred mantenance/repar work should be performed only by qualfed servce personnel. General nformaton DVDs must be treated wth care n order to prevent playback problems. Avod scratches, fnger prnts, and dust on the DVDs. Do not affx labels, nor wrte on the DVDs. Clean the DVDs regularly, usng a commercally avalable, soft cleanng tssue. Never wpe n crcular moton, always wpe from the center straght out. DVDs ejected after use should mmedately be stored n the DVD-Box. Protect the DVDs aganst heat and exposure to drect sunlght. The DVD drve s desgned to receve DVDs of IEC standard. Only DVDs not exceedng a thckness of 1.3 mm are to be used. When attemptng to nsert thcker data carrers, e.g. data carrers carryng data on both sdes (one sde DVD, the other sde Audo data), they cannot be ejected, leadng to possble damage of the drve. DVD Playback DVDs not meetng the standards could be commercally avalable. Such DVDs can cause pcture or sound problems, or other unforseeable playback problems. The audovsual system s desgned for playback of standard DVDs meetng the followng condtons: NTSC standard PAL or NTSC TV standard Normally, correspondng nformaton s provded on the DVD, or on the DVD cover. The audovsual sytem s factory-adjusted for Regonal code 2. Ths settng can be changed by an authorzed Maybach Studo. Thus, playback of vdeo DVDs of another Regonal code s possble, provded they have been produced accordng to PAL or NTSC TV standard. 248

250 Swtchng to DVD operaton Load a vdeo DVD nto the DVD player ( page 249), or call up the Audo/Vdeo man menu f a DVD has already been loaded ( page 216). Select tem DVD usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Playback begns f the vdeo DVD meets all playback condtons ( page 248). The DVD menu stored on the loaded DVD appears ( page 254). The followng message appears f the loaded vdeo DVD s not of Regonal code 2 ( page 248): REGIONAL CODE VIOLATION. Loadng a DVD Accessng the DVD player (vehcles wthout rear center seat) 1 Chrome label 2 DVD player compartment Press chrome label 1. The compartment 2 opens up. Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton Accessng the DVD player (vehcles wth rear center seat) 1 Armrest Pull the top of the armrest 1 out and fold t downward. The DVD player s now accessble. 249

251 Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton An already loaded DVD must be ejected before attemptng to load another one ( page 250). Insertng a second DVD wth another DVD stll loaded wll cause damage to the DVD drve not covered by the Maybach Lmted Warranty. 1 Dsc slot 2 DVD player Insert a vdeo-dvd nto the slot. The DVD player retracts the DVD. One-sded and two-sded vdeo DVDs are commercally avalable. On a one-sded vdeo DVD, one sde carres prnted text, the other sde s blank. The blank sde must face down for loadng. A two-sded DVD s blank on ether sde. The sde to be played must face down for loadng. Sde ndcaton s usually found on the nner rm of the DVD. The playback mode must be changed f loadng of a DVD s followed by ths falure message: VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM IS NOT CORRECT. ( page 256). Playback begns, provded the vdeo DVD meets all playback condtons ( page 248). The DVD menu, stored on the DVD, appears on the dsplay ( page 254). The followng message appears f the DVD fals to meet Regonal code 2 ( page 248): REGIONAL CODE VIOLATION. Ejectng a DVD Access the DVD player ( page 249). 1 Dsc slot 2 Eject button Press eject button. The DVD player ejects the DVD. Remove the DVD from the slot. The DVD player retracts the DVD agan f the DVD s not removed from the slot wthn a short perod of tme. Close the DVD player compartment. 250

252 DVD dsplay and DVD status bar DVD dsplay and DVD status bar are ntally faded-out when startng playback. Fadng-n of DVD dsplay and DVD status bar Durng DVD playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. The screen mage s reduced, DVD dsplay and DVD status bar appear on the screen. 1 DVD dsplay 2 DVD status bar Wth functon Sub.On actvated, the DVD nformaton appears n the center of the status bar. After approx. 8 seconds of nactvty, the system automatcally removes (fades-out) dsplay and status bar. DVD dsplay functons Item Pause or Play: The pause functon s swtched ON or OFF ( page 251). Item Stop: DVD playback stops ( page 252). Item Menu: Callng up the DVD menu stored on the DVD ( page 254). Vdeo - Rear Cabn Item Settng: Callng up the Settngs menu ( page 255). DVD operaton Pause functon Have the dsplay tems faded-n ( page 242). Select tem Pause usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. DVD playback swtches to pause. A stll screen mage s shown. Select tem Play usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. DVD playback s resumed. Stoppng DVD playback Durng DVD playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. 251

253 Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton Select tem Stop usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. DVD playback stops. Resumng DVD playback When playback was stopped, select tem Play usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. DVD playback resumes from the begnnng, or select a move ( page 252). Wth DVD playback stopped, tem Menu can also be selected. In ths case, the DVD menu stored on the DVD appears on the dsplay ( page 254). Selectng a Move A move can be selected drectly f several moves are stored on the DVD. Move selecton s possble whle DVD playback s n progress, or f t s stopped. Example: Selecton of move 3: Press key on the remote control. After a bref watng perod, playback of move 3 begns. Move selecton could also be possble n the DVD menu stored on the DVD ( page 254). Selectng a chapter or scene If the move s dvded nto chapters or scenes and move playback s n progress, chapters or scenes can be selected drectly or successvely. A specfc part of the move can also be selected usng the tme feature. Be aware that some DVDs may not allow you to select a specfc chapter or scene, or use the tme feature durng certan portons of the move (e.g. durng screen credts, age restrcton and/or parental advsores). The selecton of a chapter or of a scene could also be possble n the DVD menu stored on the DVD. 252

254 Selectng chapter or scene drectly va number keys Example: Chapter/Scene 5 Open the keypad cover on the remote control, and press key durng move playback. After a bref watng perod, playback resumes wth chapter 5 or scene 5, respectvely, or Example: Chapter/Scene 25 Open the keypad cover on the remote control, and press key twce durng move playback. For each block of 10 numerals, key has to be pressed one tme. Press key on the remote control. After a bref watng perod, playback begns wth chapter 25, or scene 25, respectvely. Selectng chapter/scene/tme drectly va selecton tem Durng DVD playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. Select tem Settng usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Go to usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Each depresson of the selecton wheel swtches the dsplay between chapter, scene, and tme selecton. Possble selectons: TITLE: Selecton of a ttle Vdeo - Rear Cabn CHAPT: Selecton of a scene DVD operaton TIME: Selecton of a move part based on tme Open the keypad cover on the remote control and enter the desred number pressng keys -. To clear the numbers entered, select tem Delete usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Indexng Press key or on the remote control. Key = Next chapter or scene. Key = Prevous chapter or scene. Fast forward / reverse Durng DVD playback, press and hold key or for as long as desred. Key = Fast forward Key = Fast reverse Fast forward or reverse ends when releasng the correspondng key. 253

255 Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton Repeatng a chapter or scene Playback of ndvdual chapters/scenes of the DVD can be repeated. Swtchng the Repeat feature ON Durng DVD playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. Select tem Settngs usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Repeat usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel once or several tmes to confrm. Each depresson of the selecton wheel swtches the dsplay of the followng tems: RPT CHAPT: Repeatng a scene RPT TITLE: Repeatng a chapter RPT OFF: Repeat feature OFF DVD menu The DVD menu s stored on the DVD tself. Dependng on the specfc DVD, ths menu can be of varyng structure; t allows certan actons or settngs, respectvely. DVDs contanng multple languages typcally allow you to select a language. Callng up the DVD menu Durng DVD playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. Select tem Menu usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The uppermost level of the DVD menu appears on the dsplay. Example of a DVD menu 1 Move start 2 Settng language/sound 3 Selectng chapter/scene 254

256 Selectng DVD menu tem Press keys,,, or on the remote control to select a menu tem. Press key on the remote control. The selecton s confrmed. COMAND executes the acton of the selected menu tem. Swtchng to the next hgher menu level A DVD menu can contan several submenus. Submenus could ncorporate a menu tem enablng the user to swtch to the next hgher menu level. Select the correspondng menu tem for ths purpose ( page 255). Extng the DVD menu A DVD menu, or a submenu could ncorporate a menu tem enablng the user to ext from the DVD menu. Select the correspondng menu tem for ths purpose ( page 255). The user can proceed as follows: Have the DVD dsplay faded-n ( page 242). Select tem Play usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. DVD playback begns, or Select tem Stop usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. DVD playback stops ( page 252). Settngs menu The followng submenus can be called up from the Settngs menu: Pcture ( page 256) Tone ( page 256) Subttle on ( page 257) Subttle ( page 257) Status ( page 258) Slow moton ( page 258) Go to ( page 253) Delete ( page 253) Repeat ( page 254) Durng DVD playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. Select tem Settngs usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The frst page of the DVD basc Settngs menu appears on the dsplay. Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton To call up the second page, select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The second page of the DVD basc Settngs menu appears. 255

257 Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton Callng up the Tone menu Start the Settngs menu ( page 255). When n the Settngs menu ( page 255), select tem Tone usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. In the Tone menu, the followng functons can be called up and adjusted: Bass ( page 204) Treble ( page 204) Balance and Fader ( page 203) Sound ( page 205) Language ( page 257) Swtchng to pcture format At the start of DVD playback, the system automatcally swtches to the approprate pcture format. Durng DVD playback, the pcture format can also be changed manually: Start the Settngs menu ( page 255). When n the Settngs menu ( page 255), select tem Pcture usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. When n the Pcture settngs menu ( page 255), select the desred pcture format usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. One of the followng formats can be selected: 16:9 Zoom 1 Zoom 2 4:3 Format Zoom can be used to reduce or completely suppress the black bars on the upper and lower edge of screen. Format change could also be possble n the DVD menu stored on the DVD tself ( page 254). Changng playback mode The playback mode has to be changed f the followng message appears when nsertng a DVD: Vdeosgnal system s not correct. Start the Settngs menu ( page 255). When n the Settngs menu ( page 255), select tem Pcture usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. When n the Pcture settngs menu ( page 255), select tem PAL/NTSC usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. 256

258 Changng DVD language The DVD language can be changed only f multple languages are supported by the DVD. Durng DVD playback, start the Settngs menu ( page 255) Select tem Settngs usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Tone usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Language usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The language changes each tme the selecton wheel s pressed. Item Language s non-functonal f the Settngs menu was called from the DVD menu. In ths case, the language noted n the DVD menu ( page 254) has to be changed, provded the menu ncorporates ths possblty. Otherwse the user can ext from the DVD menu ( page 255) and newly select tem Language of the Tone menu. Some DVDs provde auxlary language change, or language change only n the DVD menu stored on the DVD. The number of selectable languages depends on the number of languages supported by the DVD. Wat untl DVD playback takes place n the selected language. The system s not capable of language playback n DTS format. Move sound becomes naudble when selectng such a language. Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton Fadng n and out of subttles Fadng n and out of subttles s possble only f subttles are supported by the DVD. Durng DVD playback, call the Settngs menu ( page 255). Select tem Subt.on usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Item Subt. on s non-functonal f the Settngs menu was called from the DVD menu. In ths case, the subttles noted n the DVD menu ( page 254) have to be changed, provded the menu ncorporates ths possblty. Otherwse, the user can ext the DVD menu ( page 255) and newly select tem Subt. on of the Settngs menu. Subttles s actvated. To deactvate subttles, select tem Subt. on usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. 257

259 Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton Selectng subttle language Subttle language can be selected only f subttles are actvated. Durng DVD playback, call up the Settngs menu ( page 255). Select tem Subt. on usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The language s changed each tme the selecton wheel s depressed. The number of selectable subttle languages depends on the number of languages supported by the DVD. Subttles are actvated. Selecton of subttle language could also be possble n the DVD menu stored on the DVD tself ( page 254). Dsplayng actual status Status dsplay Durng DVD playback, call up the Settngs menu ( page 255). Select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Status usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The actual DVD settngs, and the currently played scene, etc., appear on the dsplay. Status fade-out Durng DVD playback, call up the settng menu ( page 255). Select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Status usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Slow-moton feature Swtchng Slow-moton ON Durng DVD playback, call up the settngs menu ( page 255). Select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Select tem Slw mot. usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The actual DVD playback changes to slow-moton playback. Swtchng Slow-moton OFF Durng DVD playback, call the Settngs menu ( page 255). Select tem More usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. When n the DVD menu, select tem Play usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The actual DVD playback resumes at normal playback speed. Settng brghtness/contrast/color Durng DVD playback, call up the Settngs menu ( page 255). Select tem Pcture usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. 258

260 Select tem Brght., Contr., or Color usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Press key or on the remote control. The settng s changed accordngly. Interactve contents DVDs could ncorporate nteractve contents (e.g. a vdeo game). Example: In a vdeo game, the sequence of events can be nfluenced by the user through selectng or trggerng of certan actons. Use keys,,,, and to select and trgger actons. Type and number of actons depend on the specfc DVD. Vdeo - Rear Cabn DVD operaton 259

261 Vdeo - Rear Cabn Vdeo Aux operaton Vdeo Aux operaton Two external vdeo sources wth sound and mage sgnals can be connected to the TV recever (Vdeo AUX1 and Vdeo AUX2). For more nformaton please contact a Maybach Studo. Vdeo AUX operaton Aux sockets (vehcles wthout rear center seat) 1 Connectons AUX2 2 Connectons AUX1 Aux sockets (vehcles wth rear center seat) 1 Connectons AUX2 2 Connectons AUX1 Swtchng to AUX1 / AUX2 operaton Call the Audo/Vdeo man menu ( page 216). Select AUX1 or AUX2 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Operaton of the external vdeo source s descrbed n the correspondng operaton manual. Dsplay and status bar When swtchng to AUX1/AUX2 operaton, the dsplay and status bar are ntally faded-out automatcally. Fadng-n dsplays Durng AUX playback, turn the selecton wheel on the remote control. The screen mage s reduced, the DVD dsplay and status bar appear on screen. The program currently tuned to s ndcated n the status bar. The followng settngs can be made for AUX operaton: Sound volume ( page 199) Fader and Balance ( page 203) Bass and treble ( page 204) Extended sound functons ( page 205) 260

262 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Important notes Telephone operaton Phone book SMS (Short Message Servce)

263 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Important notes Important notes Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Important notes Safety Instructons G Warnng Never operate a rado transmtter provded wth a bult-n or attached antenna (.e. wthout beng connected to an external antenna) from nsde the vehcle whle the engne runs. Dong so could lead to malfuncton of the vehcle's electronc system, possbly resultng n an accdent and personal njury. Tps on telephone operaton Once the cell phone specfed for your Maybach vehcle s nserted nto the cradle n the front cabn, t can be operated from the rear cabn by: usng the audovsual system and remote control Descrptons n ths Operator s Manual presume that the cell phone s nserted nto the telephone cradle n the front cabn. Ths secton descrbes operaton of the front telephone usng the rear audovsual system and remote control. Unless otherwse specfed, the descrptons and llustrated dsplays refer to the rear audovsual dsplays.! Rado transmtters, such as a portable telephone or a ctzens band unt, should only be used nsde the vehcle f they are connected to a separate exteror antenna approved by us for use on Maybach vehcles. Please read chapter "Telephone" before attemptng to operate your telephone. If the sgnal s very weak (dsplay n the status bar): Wat untl recepton mproves before placng a call. Close the wndows and reduce all external nose as much as possble when usng hands-free operaton. A bref dsconnecton from the moble network s not a malfuncton, as ths can occur when the network swtches areas. The phone automatcally attempts to agan sgn on wth a network. If the message Enter unlock code, s dsplayed, enter the unlock code ( page 266). Only then wll you be able to use all the telephone functons. You wll stll be able to make "911" emergency calls ( page 264) f the telephone s locked. 262

264 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Important notes The telephone cannot, or not yet, be used n the followng stuatons: The telephone s already unlocked, but t s not yet regstered wth the network. The message NO SERV appears n the status bar. The telephone automatcally attempts to regster wth a network. 911 emergency calls can NOT be placed f no network s avalable. If you try to place an outgong call, the message Call not possble s dsplayed temporarly. If the message Telephone beng actvated, please wat s dsplayed, If the message Please nsert phone s dsplayed. Insert the cell phone nto the cradle (see Vehcle Operator s Manual). Notes about Bluetooth connectons Many of the Maybach approved moble phones, cradles and adaptors avalable for use n your vehcle utlze Bluetooth technology to communcate wth each other and the vehcle. Dependng on your phone brand and model, the number of n-vehcle or on-dsplay COMAND telephone features supported va Bluetooth communcaton, and thus avalable for your use, may vary. The descrptons and llustratons n ths secton are based on the use of fully compatble Maybach approved moble phones and cradles that do not utlze Bluetooth technology to communcate wth each other. If your vehcle s equpped wth ntegrated Bluetooth functonalty, a Bluetooth capable moble phone, headset, Laptop, PDA, etc. s requred to utlze those features. For addtonal nformaton about Maybach approved Bluetooth moble phones and related accessores please contact the Maybach Assstance Center at FOR-MAY- Bach or your nearest authorzed Maybach Studo. 263

265 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Telephone operaton Swtchng the phone ON/OFF Telephone operaton Swtchng ON The telephone s swtched ON automatcally when COMAND s actvated. The cell phone must be readly nserted nto the cradle. If COMAND s swtched ON, the swtched off telephone can also be swtched ON manually: On the remote control, press key. Use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem TEL and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Telephone man menu appears on dsplay ( page 267). One of the the followng messages could also appear: Please nsert phone Insert the cell phone nto the cradle (see Vehcle Operator s Manual). Please nsert SIM card. Ths message appears only when usng a GSM cell phone. Insert a SIM card (see Telephone Operaton Gude). Swtchng OFF When n the Telephone man menu ( page 267), use the selecton wheel on the remote control to select tem TEL, then press and hold the selecton wheel for approx. 3 seconds, or Swtch COMAND OFF ( page 198). The telephone swtches OFF after a onemnute delay. If a call s n progress durng ths tme, the telephone swtches OFF approx. one mnute after the call s termnated. If a call s n progress (hands-free), you cannot swtch the COMAND OFF, s dsabled. "911" emergency calls G Warnng The 911 emergency call system s a publc servce. Usng t wthout due cause s a crmnal offense. The followng condtons must be met for a 911 emergency call: cell phone readly nserted telephone swtched ON avalable cell phone network If you cannot make an emergency call, you wll have to ntate rescue measures yourself. The "911" emergency call wll also functon f the telephone s locked. Placng an emergency call An emergency call can be placed usng the cell phone or COMAND. 264

266 Usng the cell phone (See Telephone Operaton Gude). Usng the remote control durng PIN or unlock code entry Select tem 911 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press selecton wheel to confrm. The system opens an nqury menu promptng f you want to dal a 911 call. The selecton marker should be on Yes. If necessary, press on the remote control to select Yes. Press to confrm Yes f you want to place the 911 emergency call. The telephone establshes the connecton, a rngng tone s audble. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. If you do not want to place the emergency call: Press on the remote control to select No when the nqury menu appears. Press on the remote control to confrm No. Usng the remote control unt after PIN and unlock code entry On the remote control, press key. Select tem TEL usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press keys,,. Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton On the remote control, press key. The telephone establshes the connecton, the rngng tone s audble. Wat untl the emergency call center answers, then descrbe the emergency. Enterng the PIN (only GSM) The PIN can be entered on the cell phone tself (see Telephone Operator s Manual). The PIN protects the telephone aganst unauthorzed use. Your PIN s found n the telephone servce provder's documentaton. Commt your PIN to memory. Most telephone functons are not avalable before enterng the PIN. 265

267 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Open the keypad cover on the remote control and for each numeral, press the correspondng key -. In case of erroneous entry, delete the last or more dgts: Select tem Delete usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. After completed entry of all numbers, select tem OK usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Provded the entry s correct the telephone logs tself nto the network. The telephone cannot be used before t s logged-n. If the nput s ncorrect, message Wrong PIN number wll appear brefly. Re-enter the PIN. Three consecutve ncorrect entres wll block the use of the SIM card. Message SIM card blocked appears brefly. The PUK has to be entered. ( Telephone Operaton Gude) Enterng the unlock code The unlock code protects the telephone aganst unauthorzed use. The unlock code can be actvated on the telephone (see Telephone Operaton Gude). Memorze the unlock code. The telephone functons are avalable only after enterng the correct unlock code. The system swtches back to last mode f the unlock code s not entered wthn 8 seconds after you are prompted to do so. Example: Unlock code 2307 Open the keypad cover on the remote control and press keys,,, and. In case of erroneous entry, delete the last or more dgts: Select tem Delete usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. After enterng all dgts, select tem OK usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. All telephone functons are avalable f the correct number has been entered. After regsterng, Ready or Roamng appears n the center of the status bar. The unlock code has to be entered agan f the entry was ncorrect. Swtchng to telephone mode When COMAND s swtched ON, swtchng to telephone mode from any other operaton mode s made as follows: On the remote control, press key. Select tem TEL usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. 266

268 The unt automatcally swtches to telephone mode to receve an ncomng call. Telephone man menu On the remote control, press key. Select tem TEL usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The Telephone man menu appears. Telephone status nformaton s dsplayed at the rght end of the status bar. The nformaton s also dsplayed n Navgaton mode (only n map dsplays). The followng dsplays are possble: READY = telephone s logged nto the moble communcatons home network and ready for use, ROAMING = telephone s logged nto a moble communcatons network outsde the home network, NO SERV = no network avalable, = telephone sgnal strength, = call s actve ( page 271). Other messages could also appear: If the message Please nsert phone, Please nsert SIM card appears, see chapter "Swtchng the phone ON/OFF" ( page 264) If the message Please enter PIN appears, see "Enterng the PIN" ( page 265) If the message Enter unlock code appears, see "Enterng unlock code" ( page 266) Selectable menu tems and optons menu tem Opens the phone book ( page 272), Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Recvd.# menu tem Opens the accepted and mssed calls lst ( page 268), Daled# menu tem Opens daled call lst ( page 268), SMS menu tem Provdes access to the SMS menu ( page 275), Entry of a phone number ( page 268). If a lst s empty, the correspondng soft key s wthout functon. Ths s ndcated by the correspondng soft key dsplay beng shaded out. Answerng an ncomng call The rngng tone s audble n the event of an ncomng call. The call screen s dsplayed on COMAND. 267

269 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Answerng calls On the remote control, press key. Phone conversaton s actve when the call s accepted. The call s conducted va hands-free feature. Sound volume s adjustable ( page 199). Further operaton functons are descrbed under "Actve call" ( page 271). Endng or refusng a call On the remote control, press key. Placng an outgong call The desred phone number has to be entered when placng an outgong call. The followng optons are avalable: Drect entry of a phone number ( page 268), ntatng redal ( page 268), selectng an entry n the accepted and mssed calls lst ( page 268), selectng an entry n the daled calls lst ( page 270), usng speed dal ( page 270), or openng of the phone book and selectng an entry ( page 272). Enterng a phone number Call up the Telephone man menu ( page 267). Open the keypad cover on the remote control, and enter the desred telephone number by pressng the correspondng keys -. Deletng the last or more dgts: Select tem Delete usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. After enterng the phone number, press key on the remote control. The telephone dals the entered number. The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. The volume can be adjusted ( page 35). For other user functons, see Actve call ( page 271). Intatng redal On the remote control, press key twce. The telephone establshes the connecton wth the number daled last. The telephone ntates the call. The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. Communcaton s conducted va the hands-free system. The volume can be adjusted ( page 35). For other user functons, see Actve call ( page 271). Accepted and mssed calls After swtchng to telephone operaton, COMAND can dsplay the number of mssed calls n the status bar. 268

270 COMAND automatcally establshes a lst of accepted and mssed calls. Ths lst s composed of up to 10 entres. The lst of accepted and mssed calls can be opened, an entry can be selected, and the call can be returned. Selectng an entry from the lst of accepted and mssed calls Openng of lst Call up the Telephone man menu ( page 267). Select tem Recvd.# usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The lst appears wth the last call hghlghted. If no calls have been receved yet the Recvd.# soft key s shaded out and wthout functon The lst appears wth the last call hghlghted. The lst s sorted chronologcally, the last accepted or mssed call s dsplayed at the top of the lst. The lst shows up to ten calls you receved last. It s a combned lstng of both accepted and mssed calls. The lst does not show or specfy whch calls were accepted and whch ones were mssed. Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Swtchng lst dsplays Select tem 123 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the lst to number dsplay. or Select tem ABC usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the lst to name dsplay. Selectng a lst entry and establshng the connecton Use or to select the desred entry. Press on the remote control. The telephone ntates the call to the selected number. 269

271 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Selectng an entry from the lst of daled calls COMAND automatcally creates a lst of the last 10 outgong calls. The lst s sorted chronologcally, the last outgong call s dsplayed at the top of the lst. Openng the lst Call up the Telephone man menu ( page 267). Select tem Daled# usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The lst appears wth the last outgong call hghlghted. Date and tme of the hghlghted call are shown n the status bar. If no calls have been placed yet the Daled # soft s shaded out and wthout functon. Swtchng lst dsplay Select tem 123 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the lst to number dsplay. If a name n the phone book s stored wth the number of the hghlghted call, t s shown n the status bar. Select tem ABC usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the lst to name dsplay. The number n the phone book assocated wth the hghlghted name s shown n the status bar. Selectng a lst entry and establshng the connecton: Press key or on the remote control to select the desred entry. Press key on the remote control. The telephone ntates the call to the correspondng number. Speed dal Call up the Telephone man menu ( page 267). Open the keypad cover on the remote control and for dalng press the key - for longer than 2 seconds. The telephone establshes the connecton wth the stored number. Establshng a connecton After enterng the phone number ( page 268), press on the remote control. Endng a call Press on the remote control. 270

272 Actve call The call s actvated the moment the other party answers the call. The call dsplay appears. The duraton of the call s dsplayed n the status bar. The followng functons are avalable durng a call: Termnaton of the actve call ( page 271) ON/OFF swtchng of the hands-free mcrophone ( page 271) Endng of an actve call Press on the remote control. Swtchng the hands-free mcrophone ON/OFF The menu tem Mc Off shows the status of the mcrophone. Mcrophone OFF: menu tem = Mcrophone ON: menu tem = Select tem Mc off usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the mcrophone OFF or ON. The color of the letterng changes accordngly. The other party cannot lsten f the mcrophone s swtched OFF; however, the other party can be lstened to. Front Telephone Rear Cabn Telephone operaton Transmttng number sequences Answerng machnes or other devces could possbly be controlled through number sequences (e.g. remote query functons). Durng an actve call open the keypad cover on the remote control, and for each numeral press one of the correspondng keys -. Characters and (#) can also be transmtted. 271

273 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Phone book Phone book Phone book The phone book contans all entres of the cell phone memory. The phone book contans all entres of the telephone SIM card f a GSM phone s used. Openng the phone book Call up the Telephone man menu ( page 267). Select tem usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The phone book appears on the dsplay. Automatcally, the frst lst entry s hghlghted. If no numbers are stored n the phone book, the soft key s shaded out and wthout functon. COMAND phone book dsplay An example dsplay for the phone book s shown above. It shows a lst of the phone book entres whose names start wth the letter B. Dsplayed n the status bar s the number of the hghlghted name, n ths example Varous cons may be assgned to the phone numbers, dependng on the entry made on the telephone: Home number Work number Fax number Man number Moble number Pager number The name of the category assgned to the phone number, e.g. Home, appears n the multfuncton dsplay n the nstrument cluster. 272

274 The followng optons are now avalable: Swtchng between number and name ( page 273). Selectng a phone book entry and establshng a call ( page 273). Addng spoken names to a phone book entry ( page 274). Deletng a phone book entry ( page 274). Swtchng between number and name Open the phone book from COMAND ( page 272). Select tem 123 usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the dsplay to number dsplay. The name of the hghlghted entry s shown n the status bar; or Select tem ABC usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths swtches the dsplay to name dsplay. The number of the hghlghted entry s shown n the status bar. Selectng a phone book entry and establshng the connecton Call up the Phone book man menu ( page 272). As descrbed n the "COMAND phone book dsplay secton ( page 272), a lst of phone book entres appears, begnnng wth a specfc frst letter (ntal). Changng ntals Press or on the remote control, once or repeatedly. Each tme the key s pressed the dsplay changes to the next letter up or down. At the end of the lst of letters the category Other s shown. Ths category combnes all entres wthout a name, or entres whose names start wth a specal character (e.g. * or #). Front Telephone Rear Cabn Selectng an entry Phone book If necessary, change the ntal letter ( page 273). Select an entry. You can scroll through the lst usng or on the remote control. Scrollng speed accelerates when pressng and holdng ether one of these keys. Establshng a connecton Press on the remote control. The telephone ntates the connecton wth the selected number. 273

275 Front Telephone Rear Cabn Phone book Addng spoken names to a phone book entry You can add up to 20 spoken names to each phone book entry. Va the voce control system you can dal a number by speakng a name. Select a phone book entry ( page 268). Press the New soft key. The voce control system prompts you to speak the name. Speak the name. The voce control system prompts you to speak the name agan. Repeat the name. The name s stored. Deletng a phone book entry Select the phone book entry to be deleted from COMAND ( page 273). Select tem Delete usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The delete prompt s dsplayed. Press on the remote control to select the menu tem Yes. Press on the remote control. The entry s deleted. 274

276 SMS (Short Message Servce) SMS (Short Message Servce) SMS messages can be receved f the vehcle s provded wth a telephone and SMS messagng s avalable from the carrer. Receved messages are saved n the folder SMS nbox ( page 275). Incomng new messages are ndcated by the symbol n the status bar. Symbol appears n the status bar f the SMS memory s full. In addton, a correspondng message s dsplayed when the folder s opened. SMS nbox Call up the Telephone man menu ( page 267). Select tem SMS usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The folder SMS nbox appears. If no SMS messages have been receved the SMS soft key s wthout functon and therefore shaded out. The SMS nbox shows the lst of receved messages. The lst s sorted chronologcally, the last message receved s dsplayed at the top of the lst. The correspondng date and tme appears n the status bar f the selected message has been receved. Press or on the remote control to select another message. Front Telephone Rear Cabn SMS (Short Message Servce) The symbol at the begnnng of a lst entry ndcates that the message has not been read. The SMS nbox offers the followng optons: Swtchng between subject and sender. Readng a message ( page 276). Deletng a message ( page 276). Swtchng between subject and sender The ncomng SMS can be dsplayed showng the sender or the subject. Selecton of the sender prompts the system to dsplay the telephone number. Open the SMS nbox ( page 275). Select tem Subject usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The frst characters of the message text appear, or select tem Sender usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The name or phone number of the message sender appears. 275

277 Front Telephone Rear Cabn SMS (Short Message Servce) The sender s number only appears f t has been transmtted. The sender s name only appears f the number and the name are already stored n the phone book ( page 272). Readng a message In the SMS nbox ( page 275), press or on the remote control to select a message. Press on the remote control. The message text appears. To scroll through the message text, press or on the remote control as requred. Swtchng between contents and sender Select tem Content usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The sender s name appears f t s lsted n the phone book. If not, only the phone number appears; or Select tem Sender usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. The message text appears. Deletng a message In the SMS nbox ( page 275), press or on the remote control to select the message to be deleted. Select tem Delete usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. A delete prompt s dsplayed. Press on the remote control to select the menu tem Yes. Press on the remote control. The message s now deleted. Extng from the SMS menu Select tem Back usng the selecton wheel on the remote control and press the selecton wheel to confrm. Ths returns you to the Telephone man menu. 276

278 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Important notes General nformaton Connectng the moble phone Operatng the rear cabn telephone system

279 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Important notes Important notes Vehcle equpment Ths Operator s manual descrbes all features, standard or optonal, potentally avalable for your vehcle at the tme of purchase. Please be aware that your vehcle mght not be equpped wth all features descrbed n ths manual. Important notes Tps on telephone operaton The telephone system n the rear cabn offers you the opton of connectng and operatng your moble phone. Ths functon s only avalable f your moble phone supports Bluetooth. Dependng on the model, functons and entres stored on your moble phone wll be avalable. You can stll operate your moble phone drectly at any tme. Calls to your moble phone are receved va the rear cabn loudspeakers (handsfree system). You can swtch to prvate mode and contnue the conversaton usng your moble phone once you have answered the call. If the sgnal s very weak (dsplay n the status bar): Wat untl recepton mproves before placng a call. Close the wndows and reduce all external nose as much as possble when usng hands-free operaton. A bref dsconnecton from the moble network s not a malfuncton, as ths can occur when the network swtches areas. The phone automatcally attempts to agan sgn on wth a network. Please note that there s no procedure to dal 911 through the rear-cabn telephone system. In the event of an emergency, use your moble phone to dal 911 drectly. 278

280 General nformaton Ths chapter descrbes operaton of the rear cabn telephone system usng the controller. General nformaton Rear cabn telephone system The rear cabn telephone system supports Bluetooth Handsfree Profle verson 1.5. Once you have connected your moble phone to the rear cabn telephone system, the system offers convenent operaton usng the controller. Moble phone operaton s stll possble va the phone's keys and dsplay whle connected to the rear cabn system. The rear cabn telephone system offers the followng functons: Incomng and outgong call Phone book, call regster Read and reply to text messages (SMS) Integrated voce control Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn General nformaton The rear cabn telephone system s set at the factory to optmally nteract wth the vehcle's functons. It s recommended that no settngs are changed unless necessary. Calls dsconnected whle the vehcle s n moton A call may be dsconnected f: there s nsuffcent GSM network coverage n certan areas you swtch from one GSM cell to another and ths cell currently has no free channels. 279

281 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Connectng the moble phone Connectng the moble phone Connectng the moble phone Regsterng a moble phone Before usng them jontly for the frst tme, the rear cabn telephone system and your moble phone must be "pared". You may need to make correspondng adjustments to your moble phone's settngs n order for t to be pared and 'vsble' for automatc connecton to the rear cabn telephone system. See the operatng nstructons of the moble phone for detals. For parng to be successful, both the moble phone and the rear cabn telephone system must be swtched on and Bluetooth must be actvated. The moble phone to be pared must be located wthn the vehcle. Each Bluetooth devce has a Bluetooth devce name. It s recommended to gve thedevce a personal name, by whch you can clearly recognze your moble phone. Actvate Bluetooth on the moble phone, see the operatng nstructons for the moble phone. Turn the key to poston 1 or 2 n the gnton lock, see the vehcle Owner's Manual. The rear cabn telephone system starts up. The rear cabn telephone system s operated usng the controller ( page 282). In the man menu, select User management. Select New user. All avalable moble phones are dsplayed. Select the moble phone you wsh to connect from the lst. The dsplay of the hands-free system wll show a Bluetooth PIN. When prompted to do so, enter the Bluetooth PIN on the moble phone and send t. Enter the user's or moble phone's ntals. Once the connecton has been successfully establshed, the phone book, call lsts and text messages stored on the moble phone are automatcally transmtted to the rear cabn telephone system. If the desred moble phone does not appear n the lst, select Par from phone from the User management menu. Search for Bluetooth devces usng the moble phone, see the operatng nstructons of the moble phone. Va Bluetooth, the rear cabn telephone system wll be dentfed as MAYBACH Bluetooth. 280

282 A total of ten moble phones can be pared wth the rear cabn telephone system. However, only one moble phone can be connected at any gven tme. If you par an eleventh moble phone wth the rear cabn telephone system, the frst moble phone to have been pared s deleted from the memory. Once the connecton has been successfully establshed, functons supported by the moble phone wll be avalable n the man menu. Whch functons become avalable depends on the model of moble phone. Connectng a moble phone wth the rear cabn telephone system The rear cabn telephone system s swtched on when the vehcle s started. To connect the rear cabn telephone system wth the most recently connected moble phone: press the button ( page 282). To connect a dfferent moble phone: select the desred phone from the user admnstraton and actvate t or Par a new moble phone. Swtchng off the rear cabn telephone system When the gnton s swtched off, the rear cabn telephone system s also swtched off. The moble phone s then dsconnected. In the settngs menu Select the Swtch off tem from the Settngs menu. Ths swtches off the rear cabn telephone system f the gnton s on. Pressng any button on the controller swtches t back on agan. Standby If you do not conduct a call usng the rear cabn telephone system for approx. 60 seconds, the dsplay enters standby mode. You can set the dsplay's brghtness for standby mode ( page 284). Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Connectng the moble phone Rear cabn telephone system bracket The rear cabn telephone system s ftted n the center console. For ease of vewng, you can tlt the control panel and the dsplay of the rear cabn telephone system by pressng the frame. P Controller 2 Dsplay 281

283 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Controller 1 Accept button 2 Control knob 3 End button Operaton usng control knob 2 conssts of a combnaton of turnng and pressng t. Turnng t makes a selecton, pressng t confrms the selecton made. Alternatvely, you can also confrm a selecton by pressng the accept button 1. Control knob 2 Accept button 1 End button 3 Functon select a desred menu navgate wthn the menus enter dgts, letters and specal characters Pressng and holdng control knob actvates voce control. accept an ncomng call confrm a selecton ntate a call to a daled phone number reject an ncomng call end an actve call return from a submenu Man menu 1 Sgnal strength of the moble phone 2 Receved text messages 3 Mssed calls 4 Actve user's ntals 5 Battery meter of the actve moble phone 6 Selected menu 7 Man area wth menus 282

284 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Not all moble phones support the optons avalable n the man menu. Optons not supported cannot be selected. Selectng a menu Use control knob 2 to select a menu from the man area. It becomes hghlghted. Confrm your selecton. The selected menu s dsplayed. Menu overvew User management The rear cabn telephone system facltates management of up to ten user profles. For each of these users, the followng data s stored: Phone book Dsplay brghtness Rngtone Dsplay language Volume settngs Call lsts The user menu allows you to: log n a user log off a user change ntals Follow the on-screen nstructons. User menu The user menu offers the followng: enterng Intals selectng the Icon color Logn loggng n a user. Ths logs off the current user. If the rear cabn telephone system cannot locate the selected user, you are returned to the user management. User logout loggng out the current user Delete deletng all of a user's data from the rear cabn telephone system Follow the on-screen nstructons. Creatng a new user Creaton of a new user requres parng the correspondng moble phone ( page 280). 283

285 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Settngs The rear cabn telephone system s set at the factory to optmally nteract wth the vehcle's functons. The followng secton descrbes the setup optons provded by the rear cabn telephone system. It s recommended that no settngs be changed unless necessary. Ths menu allows you to change man settngs of the rear cabn telephone system. Proceed as descrbed under "Selectng a menu" ( page 283) Rngtone Sets the rngtone's melody and volume. Brghtness Sets the dsplay's Brghtness and the dsplay's Standby brghtness. Conn. settngs Sets the connectvty mode between the rear cabn telephone system and the actve user after the gnton s swtched on. D Functon actve C Functon nactve You have the followng optons: Search for last user Search all users Connect manually Connect automatcally Rotaton dr. Sets the rotatonal drecton of the control knob (left/rght) Follow-up Sets the perod for whch the rear cabn telephone system remans on after the gnton s swtched off. Followup s set to zero at the factory. Reset Resets all settngs to the factory default values. All user-specfc settngs are lost. Info Detals on the rear cabn telephone system Language Sets the dsplay language Voce control Actvates/ deactvates the rear cabn telephone system voce control; sets the language to be used ( page 289) Audo Sets the mcrophone senstvty Mc sens. and allows you to Reset the audo settngs Swtch off Dsconnects the current user ndependently of the gnton swtch poston. The rear cabn telephone system can be swtched back on by pressng any button on the controller. 284

286 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Operatng the rear cabn telephone system Phone book The phone book contans the phone book entres from your moble phone. You can: search for entres set up drect dalng resynchronze a SIM card and/or moble phone wth the rear cabn telephone system Proceed as descrbed under "Selectng a menu" ( page 283) Call regster Dsplay and use the entres n the followng lsts on your moble phone: Mssed Receved Daled Select the Call lst menu tem. Select the respectve opton. Text messages (SMS) You can access the text messages on your moble phone. The rear cabn telephone system offers the followng functons: read text messages have text messages read aloud send text messages (7 text templates) Readng text messages Select the menu tem. Select the Read message menu tem. The lst of receved text messages wth senders s shown. If the sender s stored n the moble phone's phone book, hs/her name s shown. Select a text message. Confrm your selecton. The text message s dsplayed. Text message read-aloud functon Proceed as descrbed under readng text messages. When the text message s dsplayed, scroll down to ts end by turnng the control knob. Select the Read message aloud menu tem. Callng the sender of a text message If the phone number of the text message's sender s stored n the phone book, you can call hm/her. Proceed as descrbed under readng text messages. When the text message s dsplayed, scroll down to ts end by turnng the control knob. Select the Call back menu tem. Replyng to text messages Seven templates are avalable for answerng a text message. Proceed as descrbed under readng text messages. When the text message s dsplayed, scroll down to ts end by turnng the control knob. Select the Answer menu tem. Confrm your selecton. The lst of text templates appears. In the case of longer answers, only the frst lnes are shown. Select an answer. Confrm your selecton. 285

287 Rear Telephone - Rear Cabn Operatng the rear cabn telephone system The text template's full content s dsplayed together wth Send. Select Send. The text message s sent. Musc player If the vehcle s equpped accordngly, you can par audo equpment wth the rear cabn telephone system and play back musc. Pod player Ths functon allows you to operate an Pod through the rear cabn telephone system. Ths functon s only avalable f the vehcle s equpped accordngly on customer request. Dsplay keyboard Usng the dsplay keyboard, you can: enter a user's ntals search the phone book enter phone numbers 1 Selecton wndow 2 Selected letter/character 3 Characters avalable for selecton Enterng characters Select the desred character by turnng the control knob. Confrm the character by pressng the button or by pressng the control knob. The character s now shown below the selecton wndow. Select the next character. Repeat the procedure untl your entry s complete. When searchng the phone book, the dsplay keyboard s adjusted to match the avalable entres. Deletng characters Select the character. Confrm the selecton. The last character entered s deleted. 286

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator's Manual

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator's Manual Bld n der Größe 215x70 mm enfügen COMAND Operator's Manual Welcome to COMAND! Please make yourself famlar wth your COMAND control unt and read the nstructons n ths manual before operatng the COMAND system.

More information

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator's Manual

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator's Manual Bld n der Größe 215x70 mm enfügen COMAND Operator's Manual Welcome to COMAND! Please make yourself famlar wth your COMAND control unt and read the nstructons n ths manual before operatng the COMAND system.

More information

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen Order No. 6515 6709 13 Part No. 219 584 77 81 USA Edton A 2006 COMAND Operator's Manual 211/219 Bld n der Größe 215x70 mm enfügen COMAND Operator's Manual Welcome to COMAND! Please make yourself famlar

More information

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator s Manual

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator s Manual Bld n der Größe 215x70 mm enfügen COMAND Operator s Manual Welcome to COMAND! Please make yourself famlar wth your COMAND control unt and read the nstructons n ths manual before operatng the COMAND system.

More information

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator s Manual

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen. COMAND Operator s Manual Bld n der Größe 215x70 mm enfügen COMAND Operat s Manual Welcome to COMAND! Please make yourself famlar wth your COMAND control unt and read the nstructons n ths manual befe operatng the COMAND system.

More information

VRT012 User s guide V0.1. Address: Žirmūnų g. 27, Vilnius LT-09105, Phone: (370-5) , Fax: (370-5) ,

VRT012 User s guide V0.1. Address: Žirmūnų g. 27, Vilnius LT-09105, Phone: (370-5) , Fax: (370-5) , VRT012 User s gude V0.1 Thank you for purchasng our product. We hope ths user-frendly devce wll be helpful n realsng your deas and brngng comfort to your lfe. Please take few mnutes to read ths manual

More information

IP Camera Configuration Software Instruction Manual

IP Camera Configuration Software Instruction Manual IP Camera 9483 - Confguraton Software Instructon Manual VBD 612-4 (10.14) Dear Customer, Wth your purchase of ths IP Camera, you have chosen a qualty product manufactured by RADEMACHER. Thank you for the

More information

InfoTerminal Touch Installation Instructions

InfoTerminal Touch Installation Instructions Order no.: 2071 xx 1. Safety warnngs Electrcal equpment must be nstalled and ftted by qualfed electrcans only and n strct observance of the relevant accdent preventon regulatons. Cut out the crcut breaker

More information

Wightman. Mobility. Quick Reference Guide THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Wightman. Mobility. Quick Reference Guide THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Wghtman Moblty Quck Reference Gude THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK WIGHTMAN MOBILITY BASICS How to Set Up Your Vocemal 1. On your phone s dal screen, press and hold 1 to access your vocemal. If your

More information

Product documentation. Issue:

Product documentation. Issue: Product documentaton Issue: 02.05.2017 Table of Contents Product documentaton 1 enet SMART HOME system... 5 1.1 System requrements... 5 1.2 Commssonng va... 5 1.3 Operaton va enet SMART HOME app... 7 2

More information

T3 (IP) Classic connected to Integral 5

T3 (IP) Classic connected to Integral 5 IP Telephony Contact Centers Moblty Servces T3 (IP) Classc connected to Integral 5 Benutzerhandbuch User s gude Manual de usuaro Manuel utlsateur Manuale d uso Gebrukersdocumentate Contents Contents...

More information

T3 (IP) Classic connected to Integral 5

T3 (IP) Classic connected to Integral 5 IP Telephony Contact Centers Moblty Servces T3 (IP) Classc connected to Integral 5 Benutzerhandbuch User s gude Manual de usuaro Manuel utlsateur Manuale d uso Gebrukersdocumentate Contents Contents Famlarze

More information

T3 Classic connected to IP Office

T3 Classic connected to IP Office elephony IP T Contact Centers Moblty Servces T3 Classc connected to IP Offce Benutzerhandbuch User s gude Manual de usuaro Manuel utlsateur Manuale d uso Gebrukersdocumentate Contents Contents Famlarse

More information

T3 (IP) Comfort connected to Integral 5

T3 (IP) Comfort connected to Integral 5 IP Telephony Contact Centers Moblty Servces T3 (IP) Comfort connected to Integral 5 Benutzerhandbuch User s gude Manual de usuaro Manuel utlsateur Manuale d uso Gebrukersdocumentate Contents Contents Famlarze

More information

Avaya T3 Telephones connected to Integral 5 Setting up and using conference bridge Appendix to user s guide

Avaya T3 Telephones connected to Integral 5 Setting up and using conference bridge Appendix to user s guide Avaya T3 Telephones connected to Integral 5 Settng up and usng conference brdge Appendx to user s gude Issue 1 Integral 5 Software Release 2.6 September 2009 Use conference room Use conference room Your

More information

FIBARO WALL PLUG OPERATING MANUAL FGBWHWPE-102/FGBWHWPF-102 CONTENTS

FIBARO WALL PLUG OPERATING MANUAL FGBWHWPE-102/FGBWHWPF-102 CONTENTS OPERATING MANUAL EN FIBARO WALL PLUG FGBWHWPE-102/FGBWHWPF-102 CONTENTS #1: Descrpton and features 3 #2: Parng the accessory 4 #3: Reset 5 #4: Functonalty 6 v1.0 #5: W-F 8 #6: Confgurable parameters 9

More information

MRKOMNO. kéï=~ë=çñw= pfabufp=ud. aáöáí~ä=o~çáçöê~éüó. nìáåâ=êéñéêéååé=öìáçé==== båöäáëü

MRKOMNO. kéï=~ë=çñw= pfabufp=ud. aáöáí~ä=o~çáçöê~éüó. nìáåâ=êéñéêéååé=öìáçé==== båöäáëü kéï=~ë=çñw= MRKOMNO pfabufp=ud aáöáí~ä=o~çáçöê~éüó nìáåâ=êéñéêéååé=öìáçé==== båöäáëü 0123 Ths product bears the CE markng n accordance wth the provsons of the Councl Drectve 93/42/EEC of June 14, 1993

More information

T3 (IP) Classic connected to Integral 5

T3 (IP) Classic connected to Integral 5 T3 (IP) Classc connected to Integral 5 Benutzerhandbuch User s gude Manual de usuaro Manuel utlsateur Manuale d uso Gebrukersdocumentate Contents Contents Famlarze yourself wth your telephone Important

More information

ST70 Instruments. Operating Guide. Welcome. This Operating Guide. Contents

ST70 Instruments. Operating Guide. Welcome. This Operating Guide. Contents ST70 Instruments Operatng Gude Welcome Congratulatons on havng chosen a Raymarne ST70 nstrument. Ths gves you easy access to the mportant nformaton you need to make your boatng experence both safe and

More information

EXPLORER BLUETOOTH HANDSET USER MANUAL

EXPLORER BLUETOOTH HANDSET USER MANUAL EXPLORER BLUETOOTH HANDSET USER MANUAL Thrane & Thrane A/S nfo@thrane.com www.thrane.com Contents Contents... 2 Famlarze yourself wth the EXPLORER Bluetooth Handset EXPLORER Bluetooth Handset... 4 Important

More information

T3 Comfort connected to IP Office

T3 Comfort connected to IP Office T3 Comfort connected to IP Offce Benutzerhandbuch User s gude Manual de usuaro Manuel utlsateur Manuale d uso Gebrukersdocumentate Contents Contents Famlarse yourself wth your telephone Important notes...

More information

Wireless Temperature Monitoring Overview

Wireless Temperature Monitoring Overview Wreless Temperature Montorng Overvew Wreless Temperature Montorng and Alerts. Your Dashboard gves you advanced montorng, alerts (SMS or Emals), graphng and PDF reports from anywhere n the world. Product

More information

Owner s Manual Automotive Audio Player with USB 2.0 Host and with ipod USB Audio and Controls TOYOTA LEXUS SCION

Owner s Manual Automotive Audio Player with USB 2.0 Host and with ipod USB Audio and Controls TOYOTA LEXUS SCION VAIS TECHNOLOG Y www.vastech.com Owner s Manual Automotve Audo Player wth USB 2.0 Host and wth Pod USB Audo and Controls TOYOTA LEXUS SCION Copyrght (C) 2003-2012 VAIS Technology Publshed January 2, 2012

More information

A540 - A540 A. You can find the most up-to-date user guide at

A540 - A540 A. You can find the most up-to-date user guide at A540 - A540 A You can fnd the most up-to-date user gude at www.ggaset.com/manuals Ggaset A540 13 1 Ð Ã U 2 Ggaset A540A 3 12 11 4 10 18 13 9 5 17 16 14 8 6 15 7 Overvew Handset 1 Dsplay 2 Status bar (

More information

Codian MCU MCU 4200 Series

Codian MCU MCU 4200 Series Codan MCU MCU 4200 Seres Gettng started Codan MCU MCU 4200 Seres Gettng started Copyrght Codan 2008. All rghts reserved. Ths Gettng Started Gude may not be coped, photocoped, translated, reproduced, or

More information

with Optic65 and Optic25 Cameras FOR OUTDOOR TRACKING ONLY unless used in conjunction with the Indoor Tracking Accessory.

with Optic65 and Optic25 Cameras FOR OUTDOOR TRACKING ONLY unless used in conjunction with the Indoor Tracking Accessory. wth Optc6 and Optc Cameras Quck Start Gude FOR OUTDOOR TRACKING ONLY unless used n conjuncton wth the Indoor Trackng Accessory. CONGRATULATIONS ON SCORING YOUR SOLOSHOT Our category-creatng lne of personal

More information

VideoJet X10 SN Network Video Server. Installation and Operating Manual

VideoJet X10 SN Network Video Server. Installation and Operating Manual VdeoJet X10 SN Network Vdeo Server en Installaton and Operatng Manual VdeoJet X10 SN VdeoJet X10 SN Table of Contents en 3 Table of Contents 1 Preface 7 1.1 About ths Manual 7 1.2 Conventons n ths Manual

More information

Configuration guide. PlantWatchPRO. supervisor for small-medium installations LEGGI E CONSERVA QUESTE ISTRUZIONI READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Configuration guide. PlantWatchPRO. supervisor for small-medium installations LEGGI E CONSERVA QUESTE ISTRUZIONI READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. 30/06/2006 30/06/2006 30/06/2006 30/06/2006 16:36:16 16:36:16 16:36:16 16:36:16 X X X 30/06/2006 30/06/2006 30/06/2006 30/06/2006 16:36:16 16:36:16 16:36:16 16:36:16 X X 30/06/2006 16:36:16 16:36:16 16:36:16

More information

DLK Pro the all-rounder for mobile data downloading. Tailor-made for various requirements.

DLK Pro the all-rounder for mobile data downloading. Tailor-made for various requirements. DLK Pro the all-rounder for moble data downloadng Talor-made for varous requrements www.dtco.vdo.com Smply brllant, brllantly smple Always the rght soluton The DLK Pro s the VDO product famly, whch sets

More information

Installation Instructions. METRAwin Version 8/ Calibration Software

Installation Instructions. METRAwin Version 8/ Calibration Software Installaton Instructons METRAwn 90 Calbraton Software 3-349-717-15 Verson 8/05.13 Copyrght Copyrght 2003-2013 GMC-I Messtechnk GmbH. All rghts reserved. These nstallaton nstructons, as well as the software

More information

Aton CL118 DUO. Bedienungsanleitung Mode d emploi Istruzioni per l uso

Aton CL118 DUO. Bedienungsanleitung Mode d emploi Istruzioni per l uso Aton CL118 DUO Bedenungsanletung Mode d emplo Istruzon per l uso Aton CL118 13 1 Ð U 2 3 12 11 4 10 9 5 8 6 7 Overvew Overvew Handset 1 Dsplay 2 Status bar ( page 31) Icons dsplay current settngs and operatng

More information

LED Fixture Controller ELED1 Programming Guide

LED Fixture Controller ELED1 Programming Guide LED Fxture Controller ELED1 Programmng Gude ELED1-AUN ELED1-AUS Copyrght 2018 Echoflex Solutons, Inc. All rghts reserved. Product nformaton and specfcaton detals subject to change Document number: 8DC-5745

More information

Avaya Scopia XT Meeting Center

Avaya Scopia XT Meeting Center Avaya Scopa XT Meetng Center Quck Setup Gude Sngle Montor Dual Montor Package Content: Cart Components 3x/4x IEC320 Power Cords Internatonal (4xIEC) Outlet Strp Avaya Scopa XT Meetng Center Quck Setup

More information

G4CM690V16ATL20 Part No Technical data. Power factor monitoring (cosφ) in 1- or 3-phase mains

G4CM690V16ATL20 Part No Technical data. Power factor monitoring (cosφ) in 1- or 3-phase mains Power factor montorng (cosφ) n 1- or 3-phase mans Loadmontors - GAMMA seres Montorng of nductve and capactve consumers Multfuncton Temperature montorng of the motor wndng -ey, Fault latch Recognton of

More information

User Manual SAPERION Web Client 7.1

User Manual SAPERION Web Client 7.1 User Manual SAPERION Web Clent 7.1 Copyrght 2016 Lexmark. All rghts reserved. Lexmark s a trademark of Lexmark Internatonal, Inc., regstered n the U.S. and/or other countres. All other trademarks are the

More information

ST70 Instrument User Reference Manual. Document reference: Date: June 2007

ST70 Instrument User Reference Manual. Document reference: Date: June 2007 ST70 Instrument User Reference Manual Document reference: 81284-1 Date: June 2007 Raymarne, SeaTalk, SeaTalk 2 and SeaTalk ng are trademarks of Raymarne plc Book contents copyrght Raymarne plc Contents

More information

TN348: Openlab Module - Colocalization

TN348: Openlab Module - Colocalization TN348: Openlab Module - Colocalzaton Topc The Colocalzaton module provdes the faclty to vsualze and quantfy colocalzaton between pars of mages. The Colocalzaton wndow contans a prevew of the two mages

More information

F-5000 View Software Installation and Operation Guide Belcher Road South, Largo, FL USA Tel +1 (727) Fax +1 (727)

F-5000 View Software Installation and Operation Guide Belcher Road South, Largo, FL USA Tel +1 (727) Fax +1 (727) ONICON Flow and Energy Measurement F-5000 Vew Software Installaton and Operaton Gude 11451 Belcher Road South, Largo, FL 33773 USA Tel +1 (727) 447-6140 Fax +1 (727)442-5699 2032-1 / 107050 Rev B www.oncon.com

More information

User manual Twist 454

User manual Twist 454 User manual Twst 454 A31008-M2601-E151-1-2M19 Twst 454 13 1 Ð U 2 3 12 11 4 10 9 5 8 6 7 Overvew Overvew Handset 1 Dsplay 2 Status bar ( page 31) Icons dsplay current settngs and operatng status of the

More information

BITPLANE AG IMARISCOLOC. Operating Instructions. Manual Version 1.0 January the image revolution starts here.

BITPLANE AG IMARISCOLOC. Operating Instructions. Manual Version 1.0 January the image revolution starts here. BITPLANE AG IMARISCOLOC Operatng Instructons Manual Verson 1.0 January 2003 the mage revoluton starts here. Operatng Instructons BITPLANE AG Copyrght Ths document contans propretary nformaton protected

More information

userguide Intrinsically safe pager, type APG7

userguide Intrinsically safe pager, type APG7 usergude Intrnscally safe pager, type APG7 1 APG7 INTRINSICALLY SAFE PAGER LIMITATIONS OF USE Ths page contans BASEEFA related. No alteratons are permtted wthout reference to the BASEEFA lason offcer THE

More information

Cisco TelePresence MCU 4200 Series

Cisco TelePresence MCU 4200 Series Csco TelePresence MCU 4200 Seres Gettng started 61-0002-08 Contents General nformaton... 3 About the Csco TelePresence MCU 4200 Seres... 3 Package contents... 3 Port and LED locaton... 3 LED behavor...

More information

Security. Workplace Manager

Security. Workplace Manager User Gude Manageablty and Securty Workplace Manager Congratulatons on your purchase of an nnovatve product from Fujtsu. The latest nformaton about our products, tps, updates etc. can be found on the Internet

More information

Computer models of motion: Iterative calculations

Computer models of motion: Iterative calculations Computer models o moton: Iteratve calculatons OBJECTIVES In ths actvty you wll learn how to: Create 3D box objects Update the poston o an object teratvely (repeatedly) to anmate ts moton Update the momentum

More information

User Manual SAPERION Rich Client 7.1

User Manual SAPERION Rich Client 7.1 User Manual SAPERION Rch Clent 7.1 Copyrght 2016 Lexmark. All rghts reserved. Lexmark s a trademark of Lexmark Internatonal, Inc., regstered n the U.S. and/or other countres. All other trademarks are the

More information

Application Specification Miniature Spring Socket Contacts 03 MAY 11 Rev C

Application Specification Miniature Spring Socket Contacts 03 MAY 11 Rev C Applcaton Specfcaton Mnature Sprng 114-13152 Socket Contacts 03 MAY 11 Rev C All numercal values are n metrc unts [wth U.S. customary unts n brackets]. Dmensons are n mllmeters [and nches]. Unless otherwse

More information

User s Guide for Express and Select Class Printers

User s Guide for Express and Select Class Printers User s Gude for Express and Select Class Prnters ImageCard and UltraGrafx Seres June 2000 Part No. 526945-001 Lablty statement Regulatory complance Trademark acknowledgments Propretary Notce Please note

More information

PRIMERGY ECONEL 30. Operating manual. Introduction. Important notes. Preparing for use. Operation. Troubleshooting and tips.

PRIMERGY ECONEL 30. Operating manual. Introduction. Important notes. Preparing for use. Operation. Troubleshooting and tips. Introducton Important notes PRIMERGY ECONEL 30 Preparng for use Operaton Operatng manual Troubleshootng and tps System expansons Techncal data Index November 2002 edton Mcrosoft, MS, MS-DOS, Wndows, and

More information

4-channel universal dimming actuator 210W Installation Instructions

4-channel universal dimming actuator 210W Installation Instructions 4-channel unversal dmmng actuator 210W Order no.: 1043 00 System nformaton Ths devce s a product of the Instabus KNX/EIB-system and comples wth KNX drectves. Techncal knowledge obtaned n KNX tranng courses

More information

LCD Digital Microscope

LCD Digital Microscope Operatng Instructons LCD Dgtal Mcroscope 2 Contents Contents Safety nstructons 3 System requrements 4 Package contents 4 Devce vew and keypad 5 Startng up 7 Turnng on/off 9 Image capturng 9 Recordng vdeos

More information

mquest Quickstart Version 11.0

mquest Quickstart Version 11.0 mquest Quckstart Verson 11.0 cluetec GmbH Emmy-Noether-Straße 17 76131 Karlsruhe Germany www.cluetec.de www.mquest.nfo cluetec GmbH Karlsruhe, 2016 Document verson 5 27.04.2016 16:59 > Propretary notce

More information

Setup and Use. Version 3.7 2/1/2014

Setup and Use. Version 3.7 2/1/2014 Verson 3.7 2/1/2014 Setup and Use MaestroSoft, Inc. 1750 112th Avenue NE, Sute A200, Bellevue, WA 98004 425.688.0809 / 800.438.6498 Fax: 425.688.0999 www.maestrosoft.com Contents Text2Bd checklst 3 Preparng

More information

TRAINING LEVEL II. RECIPIENTS Installation companies with the MD training lv1 Distributors with MD training lv1

TRAINING LEVEL II. RECIPIENTS Installation companies with the MD training lv1 Distributors with MD training lv1 TRAINING LEVEL II RECIPIENTS Installaton companes wth the MD tranng lv1 Dstrbutors wth MD tranng lv1 - Z-WAVE - APPs - LP283WD - LP15 - PSB - OCT41 - OC66 - DI32 - OF88 - AC88 - LD88 - METEO - LED88 -

More information

ANSYS FLUENT 12.1 in Workbench User s Guide

ANSYS FLUENT 12.1 in Workbench User s Guide ANSYS FLUENT 12.1 n Workbench User s Gude October 2009 Copyrght c 2009 by ANSYS, Inc. All Rghts Reserved. No part of ths document may be reproduced or otherwse used n any form wthout express wrtten permsson

More information

Advanced Computer Networks

Advanced Computer Networks Char of Network Archtectures and Servces Department of Informatcs Techncal Unversty of Munch Note: Durng the attendance check a stcker contanng a unque QR code wll be put on ths exam. Ths QR code contans

More information

Setup and Use. For events not using AuctionMaestro Pro. Version /7/2013

Setup and Use. For events not using AuctionMaestro Pro. Version /7/2013 Verson 3.1.2 2/7/2013 Setup and Use For events not usng AuctonMaestro Pro MaestroSoft, Inc. 1750 112th Avenue NE, Sute A200, Bellevue, WA 98004 425.688.0809 / 800.438.6498 Fax: 425.688.0999 www.maestrosoft.com

More information

SLAM Summer School 2006 Practical 2: SLAM using Monocular Vision

SLAM Summer School 2006 Practical 2: SLAM using Monocular Vision SLAM Summer School 2006 Practcal 2: SLAM usng Monocular Vson Javer Cvera, Unversty of Zaragoza Andrew J. Davson, Imperal College London J.M.M Montel, Unversty of Zaragoza. josemar@unzar.es, jcvera@unzar.es,

More information

SMART PHOTO PRINTER USER'S GUIDE. Version V MODEL SmartD90-EV

SMART PHOTO PRINTER USER'S GUIDE. Version V MODEL SmartD90-EV SMART PHOTO PRINTER MODEL SmartD90-EV USER'S GUIDE Verson V1.5.2.0 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Introducton Introducton 3 Bascs 4 Constructon of compostons 5 Operaton Easy Prnt Servce 8 Fun Prnt Servce 10 Sharng

More information

CMPS 10 Introduction to Computer Science Lecture Notes

CMPS 10 Introduction to Computer Science Lecture Notes CPS 0 Introducton to Computer Scence Lecture Notes Chapter : Algorthm Desgn How should we present algorthms? Natural languages lke Englsh, Spansh, or French whch are rch n nterpretaton and meanng are not

More information

EICON Remote Control User s Guide

EICON Remote Control User s Guide EICON Remote Control User s Gude Installaton of the Wrng Harness (for MRX-12 through MRX-48) 1. Verfy that the host system wrng s n good condton and that there are no shorted solenods, relays, or feld

More information

HR-XV2EK OWNER'S MANUAL DVD PLAYER/VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER PAL POWER SEARCH TITLE SHOWVIEW. VIDEO Plus+ TV/VCR TV/VCR PR CANCEL TV/VCR PR EJECT

HR-XV2EK OWNER'S MANUAL DVD PLAYER/VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER PAL POWER SEARCH TITLE SHOWVIEW. VIDEO Plus+ TV/VCR TV/VCR PR CANCEL TV/VCR PR EJECT TV MENU DISPLAY REPEAT A-B AUX VCR MEMORY SUBTITLE ZOOM TV SEARCH ANGLE TITLE TV/VCR TV/VCR PR + TV/VCR PR AUDIO MONITOR OK PROG. POWER EJECT RETURN REPEAT SHOWVIEW VIDEO Plus+ TV 0000 CANCEL PLAYER/VIDEO

More information

11. HARMS How To: CSV Import

11. HARMS How To: CSV Import and Rsk System 11. How To: CSV Import Preparng the spreadsheet for CSV Import Refer to the spreadsheet template to ad algnng spreadsheet columns wth Data Felds. The spreadsheet s shown n the Appendx, an

More information

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 CONTENTS

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 CONTENTS OPERATING MANUAL EN FIBARO DIMMER 2 FGD-212 CONTENTS #1: Descrpton and features 4 #2: Supported loads 5 #3: FIBARO Bypass 2 (FGB-002) 7 #4: Installaton 8 #5: Addng/removng the devce 11 #6: Operatng the

More information

Virtual Memory. Background. No. 10. Virtual Memory: concept. Logical Memory Space (review) Demand Paging(1) Virtual Memory

Virtual Memory. Background. No. 10. Virtual Memory: concept. Logical Memory Space (review) Demand Paging(1) Virtual Memory Background EECS. Operatng System Fundamentals No. Vrtual Memory Prof. Hu Jang Department of Electrcal Engneerng and Computer Scence, York Unversty Memory-management methods normally requres the entre process

More information

A Binarization Algorithm specialized on Document Images and Photos

A Binarization Algorithm specialized on Document Images and Photos A Bnarzaton Algorthm specalzed on Document mages and Photos Ergna Kavalleratou Dept. of nformaton and Communcaton Systems Engneerng Unversty of the Aegean kavalleratou@aegean.gr Abstract n ths paper, a

More information

Operator's Manual EU4 / EU6 / EU8. External Unwinder. Made in Germany

Operator's Manual EU4 / EU6 / EU8. External Unwinder. Made in Germany Operator's Manual External Unwnder EU4 / EU6 / EU8 Made n Germany 2 Operator's Manual 2 for the followng products Part.-No. Descrpton Type 5946091 External Unwnder EU4 5946421 External Unwnder EU6 5945806

More information

Life Tables (Times) Summary. Sample StatFolio: lifetable times.sgp

Life Tables (Times) Summary. Sample StatFolio: lifetable times.sgp Lfe Tables (Tmes) Summary... 1 Data Input... 2 Analyss Summary... 3 Survval Functon... 5 Log Survval Functon... 6 Cumulatve Hazard Functon... 7 Percentles... 7 Group Comparsons... 8 Summary The Lfe Tables

More information

A540 H. Congratulations

A540 H. Congratulations A540 H Congratulatons By purchasng a Ggaset, you have chosen a brand that s fully commtted to sustanablty. Ths product s packagng s eco-frendly! To learn more, vst www.ggaset.com. 1 Ð U 2 3 12 11 4 10

More information

General Description. Description

General Description. Description June 0 Sheet 0 Metal-Enclosed Swtchgear MVS Medum Voltage Load Interrupter Fusble Swtch General Descrpton.0- Motor Operated MVS Swtches Applcaton Eaton s Cutler-Hammer MVS Pow-R- Drve motor operator makes

More information

Installation and User Guide. Digidim Remote Control (303) Product description. Switching Lights On/Off using Digidim 303 Remote

Installation and User Guide. Digidim Remote Control (303) Product description. Switching Lights On/Off using Digidim 303 Remote Installaton and User Gude Dgdm Remote Control (0) Product descrpton The Dgdm Remote (0) can be used n conjuncton wth the Dm Sense to modfy the preset lght levels and recall/ store scenes, as well as actvatng

More information

Installation manual for control panel for 2-motor 24V automations with built-in radio AUX. Electric lock. Flashing light 24V= 24V=

Installation manual for control panel for 2-motor 24V automations with built-in radio AUX. Electric lock. Flashing light 24V= 24V= Dtec E2H Installaton manual for control panel for 2-motor 24V automatons wth bult-n rado IP1967EN Power unt BATK1 TRF 24V AUX COM Memory card ANT JR5 POWER GOL4 FUSE ESC ENTER DOWN UP F1 L N 36 35 34 33

More information

Alufix Expert D Design Software #85344

Alufix Expert D Design Software #85344 238 ALUFIX SOFTWARE Alufx Expert 2014 3D Desgn Software #85344 Alufx Expert software makes automatc desgns for fxtures wth correspondng partlsts. You choose the system and defne clampng ponts. The software

More information

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 CONTENTS

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 CONTENTS OPERATING MANUAL EN FIBARO DIMMER 2 FGD-212 CONTENTS #1: Descrpton and features 4 #2: Supported loads 5 #3: FIBARO Bypass 2 (FGB-002) 7 #4: Installaton 8 #5: Addng/removng the devce 11 #6: Operatng the

More information

R s s f. m y s. SPH3UW Unit 7.3 Spherical Concave Mirrors Page 1 of 12. Notes

R s s f. m y s. SPH3UW Unit 7.3 Spherical Concave Mirrors Page 1 of 12. Notes SPH3UW Unt 7.3 Sphercal Concave Mrrors Page 1 of 1 Notes Physcs Tool box Concave Mrror If the reflectng surface takes place on the nner surface of the sphercal shape so that the centre of the mrror bulges

More information

A mathematical programming approach to the analysis, design and scheduling of offshore oilfields

A mathematical programming approach to the analysis, design and scheduling of offshore oilfields 17 th European Symposum on Computer Aded Process Engneerng ESCAPE17 V. Plesu and P.S. Agach (Edtors) 2007 Elsever B.V. All rghts reserved. 1 A mathematcal programmng approach to the analyss, desgn and

More information

A540 H. Congratulations

A540 H. Congratulations A540 H Congratulatons By purchasng a Ggaset, you have chosen a brand that s fully commtted to sustanablty. Ths product s packagng s eco-frendly! To learn more, vst www.ggaset.com. 1 Ð U 2 3 12 11 4 10

More information

3D vector computer graphics

3D vector computer graphics 3D vector computer graphcs Paolo Varagnolo: freelance engneer Padova Aprl 2016 Prvate Practce ----------------------------------- 1. Introducton Vector 3D model representaton n computer graphcs requres

More information

ELEC 377 Operating Systems. Week 6 Class 3

ELEC 377 Operating Systems. Week 6 Class 3 ELEC 377 Operatng Systems Week 6 Class 3 Last Class Memory Management Memory Pagng Pagng Structure ELEC 377 Operatng Systems Today Pagng Szes Vrtual Memory Concept Demand Pagng ELEC 377 Operatng Systems

More information

USING GRAPHING SKILLS

USING GRAPHING SKILLS Name: BOLOGY: Date: _ Class: USNG GRAPHNG SKLLS NTRODUCTON: Recorded data can be plotted on a graph. A graph s a pctoral representaton of nformaton recorded n a data table. t s used to show a relatonshp

More information

Filling level and Temperature Sensor HFT C4 / R / MD

Filling level and Temperature Sensor HFT C4 / R / MD Fllng level and Temperature Sensor HFT C4 / R / MD Level measurng range 0.25-5.0 m Pressure measurng range 0-0.5 bar Temperature measurng range -10 100 C Voltage supply 18 30 V DC Features Fllng level

More information

Zwick. Materials testing I 8 ~ I J S / KAlnhalt / V4.7

Zwick. Materials testing I 8 ~ I J S / KAlnhalt / V4.7 Zwck Materals testng Copyrght (C) 1995-2002 Zwck GmbH & Co August-Nagel-StraBe 11, Ulm, Deutschland Telefon: +49 1 02 25 Telefax: +49 1 02 00 Zwck m nternet: http://wn.zwck.com und http://www.zwck.de EMal:

More information

(FW Version )

(FW Version ) (FW Verson 1.10.0.16) Table of Contents WHAT S NEW... 5 1. INTRODUCTION... 6 1.1. Welcome... 6 1.2. Gettng Started... 6 1.3. IP Address Settng... 6 2. USING A WEB BROWSER... 8 2.1. ActveX Installaton (AxUMF.cab)...

More information

Compiler Design. Spring Register Allocation. Sample Exercises and Solutions. Prof. Pedro C. Diniz

Compiler Design. Spring Register Allocation. Sample Exercises and Solutions. Prof. Pedro C. Diniz Compler Desgn Sprng 2014 Regster Allocaton Sample Exercses and Solutons Prof. Pedro C. Dnz USC / Informaton Scences Insttute 4676 Admralty Way, Sute 1001 Marna del Rey, Calforna 90292 pedro@s.edu Regster

More information

THE HEAT CONTROLLER RADIATOR THERMOSTAT FGT-001

THE HEAT CONTROLLER RADIATOR THERMOSTAT FGT-001 OPERATING MANUAL EN THE HEAT CONTROLLER RADIATOR THERMOSTAT FGT-001 CONTENTS #1: Descrpton and features 3 #2: Basc actvaton 4 #3: Addng to Z-Wave network 5 #4: Removng the devce 6 #5: Controllng the temperature

More information

User Manual. Kratbjerg DK 3480 Fredensborg - Denmark - Phone:

User Manual. Kratbjerg DK 3480 Fredensborg - Denmark - Phone: User Manual User Manual Kratbjerg 4 - DK 3480 Fredensborg - Denmark - Phone: +45 48 48 6 33 - Emal: sales@tf-technologes.com www.tf-technologes.com 3 About MatManager TM User Manual Content and structure

More information

Brave New World Pseudocode Reference

Brave New World Pseudocode Reference Brave New World Pseudocode Reference Pseudocode s a way to descrbe how to accomplsh tasks usng basc steps lke those a computer mght perform. In ths week s lab, you'll see how a form of pseudocode can be

More information

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 CONTENTS

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 CONTENTS OPERATING MANUAL US FIBARO DIMMER 2 FGD-212 CONTENTS #1: Descrpton and features 4 #2: Supported loads 5 #3: FIBARO Bypass 2 (FGB-002) 7 #4: Installaton 8 #5: Addng/removng the devce 11 #6: Operatng the

More information

Lobachevsky State University of Nizhni Novgorod. Polyhedron. Quick Start Guide

Lobachevsky State University of Nizhni Novgorod. Polyhedron. Quick Start Guide Lobachevsky State Unversty of Nzhn Novgorod Polyhedron Quck Start Gude Nzhn Novgorod 2016 Contents Specfcaton of Polyhedron software... 3 Theoretcal background... 4 1. Interface of Polyhedron... 6 1.1.

More information

Wishing you all a Total Quality New Year!

Wishing you all a Total Quality New Year! Total Qualty Management and Sx Sgma Post Graduate Program 214-15 Sesson 4 Vnay Kumar Kalakband Assstant Professor Operatons & Systems Area 1 Wshng you all a Total Qualty New Year! Hope you acheve Sx sgma

More information

ETAtouch RESTful Webservices

ETAtouch RESTful Webservices ETAtouch RESTful Webservces Verson 1.1 November 8, 2012 Contents 1 Introducton 3 2 The resource /user/ap 6 2.1 HTTP GET................................... 6 2.2 HTTP POST..................................

More information

EN Operating and installation instructions for RADEMACHER tubular motors... 27

EN Operating and installation instructions for RADEMACHER tubular motors... 27 Operatng and nstallaton nstructons for RADEMACHER tubular motors... 27 Applcable for the followng seres: RolloTube Intellgent Small/Medum Item numbers: 2640 06 95 / 2640 10 95 / 2660 10 95 / 2660 20 95

More information

TECHNIQUE OF FORMATION HOMOGENEOUS SAMPLE SAME OBJECTS. Muradaliyev A.Z.

TECHNIQUE OF FORMATION HOMOGENEOUS SAMPLE SAME OBJECTS. Muradaliyev A.Z. TECHNIQUE OF FORMATION HOMOGENEOUS SAMPLE SAME OBJECTS Muradalyev AZ Azerbajan Scentfc-Research and Desgn-Prospectng Insttute of Energetc AZ1012, Ave HZardab-94 E-mal:aydn_murad@yahoocom Importance of

More information

3D Virtual Eyeglass Frames Modeling from Multiple Camera Image Data Based on the GFFD Deformation Method

3D Virtual Eyeglass Frames Modeling from Multiple Camera Image Data Based on the GFFD Deformation Method NICOGRAPH Internatonal 2012, pp. 114-119 3D Vrtual Eyeglass Frames Modelng from Multple Camera Image Data Based on the GFFD Deformaton Method Norak Tamura, Somsangouane Sngthemphone and Katsuhro Ktama

More information

Dual In- Line Package (DIP)

Dual In- Line Package (DIP) Dual In- Lne Package (DIP) Applcaton Specfcaton Programmng Swtches 114-1056 (7000 and 7100 Seres) 03 MAY 11 Rev D All numercal values are n metrc unts [wth U.S. customary unts n brackets]. Dmensons are

More information

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 ENG CONTENTS

FIBARO DIMMER 2 OPERATING MANUAL FGD-212 ENG CONTENTS OPERATING MANUAL ENG FIBARO DIMMER 2 FGD-212 CONTENTS #1: Descrpton and features 4 #2: Supported loads 5 #3: FIBARO Bypass 2 (FGB-002) 7 #4: Installaton 8 #5: Addng/removng the devce 11 #6: Operatng the

More information

In this section, user interface of the device, how to access to the parameters, description of the parameters are explained.

In this section, user interface of the device, how to access to the parameters, description of the parameters are explained. ABOUT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Instructon manual of ESM-4450 Process Controller conssts of two man sectons. Explanaton of these sectons are below. Also, there are other sectons whch nclude order nformaton and

More information

Assembler. Building a Modern Computer From First Principles.

Assembler. Building a Modern Computer From First Principles. Assembler Buldng a Modern Computer From Frst Prncples www.nand2tetrs.org Elements of Computng Systems, Nsan & Schocken, MIT Press, www.nand2tetrs.org, Chapter 6: Assembler slde Where we are at: Human Thought

More information

user journey: a series of steps (typically 4-12) which represent a scenario in which a user might interact with the thing you are designing.

user journey: a series of steps (typically 4-12) which represent a scenario in which a user might interact with the thing you are designing. Topc Dscovery user journey: a seres of steps (typcally 4-12) whch represent a scenaro n whch a user mght nteract wth the thng you are desgnng. Two (2) man uses: 1. demonstratng the way users currently

More information

Configuration Manual. Label Printer EOS

Configuration Manual. Label Printer EOS Confguraton Manual Label Prnter EOS 2 Confguraton Manual 2 for the followng products Famly EOS Type EOS1 EOS4 Edton: 01/2013 - Part No. 9009272 Copyrght Ths documentaton as well as translaton hereof are

More information

A Fast Visual Tracking Algorithm Based on Circle Pixels Matching

A Fast Visual Tracking Algorithm Based on Circle Pixels Matching A Fast Vsual Trackng Algorthm Based on Crcle Pxels Matchng Zhqang Hou hou_zhq@sohu.com Chongzhao Han czhan@mal.xjtu.edu.cn Ln Zheng Abstract: A fast vsual trackng algorthm based on crcle pxels matchng

More information